Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Bay Computer
with Feeder Protection
C264P/EN T/C80
Technical Guide
Technical Guide C264P/EN T/C80
MiCOM C264P
BAY COMPUTER WITH FEEDER PROTECTION
CONTENTS
BLANK PAGE
Safety & Handling C264P/EN SA/C80
MiCOM C264P
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION 3
7. GUARANTEES 10
BLANK PAGE
Safety & Handling C264P/EN SA/C80
1. INTRODUCTION
This document is a chapter of the MiCOM C264/C264C documentation. It describes the
safety, handling, packing and unpacking procedures applicable to MiCOM C264/C264C
modular computer series and associated equipment's and software tools.
C264P/EN SA/C80 Safety & Handling
Equipment in this
category is qualification
tested at 5kV peak,
1.2/50μs, 500Ω. 0.5J,
between all supply
circuits and earth and
also between
independent circuits.
Environment: IEC 60255-27: 2005 Compliance is
demonstrated by
Pollution degree 2
reference to safety
EN 60255-27: 2006 standards.
7. GUARANTEES
The media on which you received Schneider Electric software are guaranteed not to fail
executing programming instructions, due to defects in materials and workmanship, for a
period of 90 days from date of shipment, as evidenced by receipts or other documentation.
Schneider Electric will, at its option, repair or replace software media that do not execute
programming instructions if Schneider Electric receive notice of such defects during the
guaranty period. Schneider Electric does not guaranty that the operation of the software shall
be uninterrupted or error free.
A Return Material Authorisation (RMA) number must be obtained from the factory and clearly
marked on the package before any equipment acceptance for guaranty work.
Schneider Electric will pay the shipping costs of returning to the owner parts, which are
covered by warranty.
Schneider Electric believe that the information in this document is accurate. The document
has been carefully reviewed for technical accuracy. In the event that technical or
typographical errors exist, Schneider Electric reserves the right to make changes to
subsequent editions of this document without prior notice to holders of this edition. The
reader should consult Schneider Electric if errors are suspected. In no event shall
Schneider Electric be liable for any damages arising out of or related to this document or the
information contained in it.
Expect as specified herein, Schneider Electric makes no guaranties, express or implied and
specifically disclaims and guaranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
Customer's rights to recover damages caused by fault or negligence on the part
Schneider Electric shall be limited to the amount therefore paid by the customer.
Schneider Electric will not be liable for damages resulting from loss of data, profits, use of
products or incidental or consequential damages even if advised of the possibility thereof.
This limitation of the liability of Schneider Electric will apply regardless of the form of action,
whether in contract or tort, including negligence. Any action against Schneider Electric must
be brought within one year after the cause of action accrues. Schneider Electric shall not be
liable for any delay in performance due to causes beyond its reasonable control. The
warranty provided herein does not cover damages, defects, malfunctions, or service failures
caused by owner's failure to follow the Schneider Electric installation, operation, or
maintenance instructions. Owner's modification of the product; owner's abuse, misuse, or
negligent acts; and power failure or surges, fire, flood, accident, actions of third parties, or
other events outside reasonable control.
Safety & Handling C264P/EN SA/C80
MiCOM C264P
INTRODUCTION
Introduction C264P/EN IT/C80
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM 3
BLANK PAGE
Introduction C264P/EN IT/C80
1. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It
comprises a range of components, systems and services from Schneider Electric.
Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive
communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control system.
The components within MiCOM are:
• A range industrial PC
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and
behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can also provide
measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre enabling remote
monitoring and control to take place.
The MiCOM range will continue to be expanded. The general features of MiCOM will also be
enhanced, as we are able to adopt new technology solutions.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website:
www.schneider-electric.com
C264P/EN IT/C80 Introduction
Master clock
(GPS)
Operator
Interface
HV FEEDER BAY
Fast Ethernet
IEC 61850
C264
C264C
Main protection
EHV FEEDER BAY
I/Os
C264
I/Os
MV FEEDER BAYS
COMMON BAY
PSTN or Remote
SCADA Interface
dedicated HMI
DNP3 & IEC 60870-5-101
line
& IEC 60870-5-104
Px30
Px40
NP3,
DBUS,
M720 IE 0-5-103,
I 870-5-101
Px20
Px30
PLC
BC
I/Os
I/Os
C0002ENb
• The system application on “figure 1” uses several C264 linked together on SBUS
Ethernet. A gateway grants access to a SCADA.
• Standalone application use one C264 linked to IEDs and possibly to a remote SCADA.
C264P/EN IT/C80 Introduction
BLANK PAGE
Technical Data C264P/EN TD/C80
MiCOM C264P
TECHNICAL DATA
Technical Data C264P/EN TD/C80
CONTENT
2. CONFORMITY 4
3. GENERAL DATA 5
3.1 Design 5
3.2 Installation Position 5
3.3 Degree of Protection 5
3.4 Weight 5
3.5 Dimensions and Connections 5
3.6 MICOM C264 Computer: Configuration 5
3.7 C264 Technical Data 8
3.7.1 C264: Element limits 8
3.8 Terminals 9
3.9 Creepage Distances and Clearances 10
4. RATINGS 11
4.1 Auxiliary Voltage 11
4.2 Power Supply 11
4.2.1 BIU241 Digital Outputs 11
4.2.2 BIU261 Dual Sources power supply board 11
4.3 Circuit breaker Control Unit (CCU) Digital Inputs 13
4.3.1 CCU200 Digital Inputs 13
4.3.2 CCU211 Digital Inputs 13
4.4 Circuit breaker Control Unit (CCU) Digital Outputs 14
4.4.1 CCU200 Digital Outputs 14
4.4.2 CCU211 Digital Output 14
4.5 Digital Input Unit (DIU) Digital Inputs 16
4.5.1 DIU200 Digital Inputs 16
4.5.2 DIU211 Digital Inputs 17
4.6 Digital Output Unit (DOU) Digital Outputs 18
4.6.1 DOU201 Digital Output 18
4.7 Analogue Input Unit (AIU) Analogue Inputs 19
4.7.1 AIU201 Analogue Input 19
4.7.2 AIU211 Analogue Input 20
4.8 Protection CT/VT inputs 21
4.8.1 TMU210 – Current Transformers (CT) 21
4.8.2 TMU210 – Voltage Transformers (VT) 22
4.8.3 TMU210 - A/D Converter 22
4.9 Analogue Output Unit (AOU) 23
C264P/EN TD/C80 Technical Data
5. BURDENS 25
5.1 Auxiliary Voltage 25
5.2 Power Supply 25
5.3 CPU Boards 25
5.4 Circuit breaker Control Units (CCU) Input Burdens 26
5.4.1 CCU200 Input Burden 26
5.4.2 CCU211 Input Burden 26
5.5 Digital Input Unit (DIU) Input Burden 26
5.5.1 DIU200 Input Burden 26
5.5.2 DIU211 Input Burden 27
5.6 Digital Output Unit (DOU) Input Burden 27
5.6.1 DOU201 Input Burden 27
5.7 Analogue Input Unit (AIU) Input Burden 28
5.7.1 AIU201 Input Burden 28
5.7.2 AIU211 Input Burden 28
5.8 Transducerless Measurement Unit (TMU) Input Burden 28
5.9 Analogue Output Unit (AOU) Input Burden 28
5.9.1 AOU200 Input Burden 28
5.10 Ethernet Switches Board Input Burden 28
5.11 Front Panel Board Input Burden 28
6. ACCURACY 29
6.1 Reference Conditions 29
6.2 Measurement Accuracy 29
7. TYPE TESTS 30
7.1 Dielectric Strength Tests 30
7.1.1 AIU211 – Dielectric Strength Test 30
7.1.2 ECU200/ECU201 – Dielectric Strength Test 30
7.1.3 MiCOM C264 and C264C – Dielectric Strength Test 30
7.2 Mechanical Test 31
7.3 Atmospheric Test 32
7.4 DC Auxiliary Supply Test 32
7.5 AC Auxiliary Supply Test 33
7.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Tests 33
Technical Data C264P/EN TD/C80
2. CONFORMITY
(Per Article 10 of EC Directive 72/73/EC).
The product designated “MiCOM C264P computer” has been designed and manufactured in
conformance with the European standards EN 60255-6 and EN 61010-1 and with the ‘EMC
Directive’ and the ‘Low Voltage Directive’ issued by the Council of the European Community.
Technical Data C264P/EN TD/C80
3. GENERAL DATA
3.1 Design
Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush-mounted case for 19” cabinets
and for control panels.
3.2 Installation Position
Vertical ±15°
3.3 Degree of Protection
In agreement with DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60255-27:2006, or with IEC 60255-27:2005:
• IP20 for rear panels of C264/C264C, except reduced to IP10 when the black MiDOS
28-pin terminal block is installed for the TMU board.
3.4 Weight
Case 40 TE: approximately 4 kg
Case 80 TE: approximately 8 kg
3.5 Dimensions and Connections
Please refer to the dimensional drawings (C264_EN_HW, hardware description chapter) and
to the terminal connection diagrams (C264_EN_CO).
3.6 MICOM C264 Computer: Configuration
The MiCOM C264 computer includes:
• A case
Q P O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A
BIU24x X 1
CPU 270 X 1
CCU200 (1) X X X X X X X X X X X X X ≤ 12
CCU211 (1) X X X X X X X X X X X X X ≤ 12
DIU200 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ≤ 12
DIU211 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ≤ 12
DOU201 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ≤ 12
AIU201 X X X X X X X ≤7
AIU211 X X X X X X X ≤7
TMU210 (1) X 1
AOU200 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ≤4
SWU20x X ≤1
SWR2xx X ≤1
SWD2xx X ≤1
GHU2A1 (3) 1
H G F E D C B A
BIU24x X 1
CPU 270 X 1
CCU200 (1) X X X ≤3
CCU211 (1) X X X ≤3
DIU200 X X X X ≤3
DIU211 X X X X ≤3
DOU201 X X X X ≤3
AIU201 X X X X ≤3
AIU211 X X X X ≤3
TMU210 (1) X=1 1
AOU200 X X X X ≤3
SWU20x X X ≤1
SWR2xx X X ≤1
SWD2xx X X ≤1
GHU2A0 (3) 1
(1)
Do not install the CCU in slot P and do not install the CCU in the slot adjacent to the TMU.
(3)
A = 0: Has LCD A=1: Has no LCD A= 2: Has remote LCD
Technical Data C264P/EN TD/C80
3.8 Terminals
PC Maintenance Interface:
• DIN 41652 connector, type female D-Sub, 9-pin, installed on the front panel
• Two of the RJ-45 female connector, 8-pin for the 10/100Base-T self-negotiation
The IRIG-B interface (standard NF S 87-500, May 1987), installed on the CPU260/270
board:
• BNC plug
• M3 threaded terminal ends, self-centering with wire protection for conductor cross
sections from 0.2 to 2.5 mm² for BIU241 board
• DIN 41652 connector; type D-Sub, 9-pin, installed on the CPU260/270? board.
• Optical fibres through ECU200 (external RS232/optical converter): optical plastic fibre
connection in agreement with IEC 874-2 or DIN 47258 or ST ® glass fibre optic
connection (ST ® is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors).
Input /Output or power supply modules:
• M3 threaded terminal ends, self-centring with wire protection for conductor cross
sections from 0.2 to 2.5 mm² for these boards:
− AIU201, AIU211
− AOU200
− BIU241
− CCU200, CCU211
− DIU200, DIU211
− DOU201
− DSP210
• The I/O boards and BIU241 include a 24-pin, 5.08 mm pitch male-connector.
Current-measuring and Voltage-measuring inputs:
• M5 threaded terminal ends, self-centering with wire protection for conductor cross
sections between 2.5 and 4 mm² for the TMU board.
4. RATINGS
4.1 Auxiliary Voltage
The C264 computer is available in four auxiliary voltage versions, as follows:
The nominal frequency (Fn) for the AC auxiliary voltage is dual rated at 50/60Hz, the operate
range is 45Hz to 65Hz.
The BIU241 board includes these attributes:
• Power supply: 40 W
• Supply monitoring
Limitation
• The board contains the Port 2 only. The communication port 2 remains the same as
the BIU241.
• The board has been design to support two voltage ranges, direct current only:
Performances
Same for
Version Nominal voltage (+/-20%) Triggering threshold (VDC)
DIU200
A01 24VDC if V >10.1VDC Input status is set YES
if V < 5VDC Input status is reset
A02 48 thru 60VDC if V >17.4VDC Input status is set YES
if V < 13.5VDC Input status is reset
A03 110 thru 125VDC if V > 50VDC Input status is set YES
if V< 34.4VDC Input status is reset
A04 220VDC if V > 108VDC Input status is set YES
if V< 63VDC Input status is reset
A07 110 thru 125VDC if V > 86VDC input status is set NO
if V < 67VDC input status is reset
For more installation data about this board, please refer to the topic, MiCOM 264 Computer:
Configuration.
4.3.2 CCU211 Digital Inputs
There are six versions of the CCU211 board, as follows:
For more installation data about this board, please refer to the topic, MiCOM 264 Computer:
Configuration.
C264P/EN TD/C80 Technical Data
• You wire the two output contacts of each relay in serial. In this event, you make the
best use of the Break function for each relay..
On the CCU200 board, the details of the 4 Output Relay Contacts show in the table that
follows:
Description Values
Nominal operating voltage range 24 thru 250VDC / 230VAC
Make 5A
Carry 5A continuously
30A for 500 ms or 250A for 30 ms
Break (Output contacts used DC: 50 W resistive, 30 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
separately)
AC: 1250 VA resistive, 1250 VA inductive (cos ϕ = 0,7)
In these conditions, the contact resistance is still lower
than 250 mΩ for 10000 operations
Break (Output contacts wired in DC: 80 W resistive for current lower than 1A,
serial) 100W resistive for current upper than 1A,
30 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
• A self-monitoring device for the output control chain: address check, state monitoring
• You can configure the digital outputs only in the double remote signalling
configuration.
• You wire the two output contacts of each relay in serial. In this event, you make the
best use of the Break function for each relay.
For more details, please refer to the table that follows.
Description Values
Nominal operating voltage range 24 thru 250VDC / 230VAC
Make 5A
Carry 5A continuously
30A for 500 ms or 250A for 30 ms
Break (output contact used DC: 50 W resistive, 30 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
separately)
AC: 1250 VA resistive, 1250 VA inductive (cos ϕ = 0.7)
In these conditions, the contact resistance is still lower
than 250 mΩ for 10000 operations
Break (Output contacts wired in DC: 80 W resistive for current lower than 1A,
serial) 100W resistive for current upper than 1A,
30 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
For more installation data about this board, please refer to the topic, MiCOM 264 Computer:
Configuration.
Technical Data C264P/EN TD/C80
The inputs are suitable for use on systems with nominal battery voltages from 24Vd.c. to
220Vd.c (+/- 20%). The input responds to negative input voltages. The inputs are not self-
controlled. The threshold voltage depends on the selection of the voltage range :
For CPU2 and CPU3, use jumpers to select the nominal voltage.
For use with CPU 2 board, use a four-position header and jumper to select the address of
the board.
For use with CPU 3 board, the location of the DIU211 in the C264 rack defines the address
of the board. If you use the DIU211 as a spare of a previous board, you can use the jumper
to define the address of the board. Use the PACiS tool, System Configuration Editor (SCE)
to define this location.
For an input voltage from the threshold value to 18V, the input current is 30mA. The voltage
applied to the input terminals, with amplitude of between 19,2VDC and 264VDC powers the
pulse generation circuit. The circuit drives a pulse of current with amplitude of 30mA. The
pulse duration is between 1ms and 2ms.
To reduce thermal dissipation, especially at high input voltages, the inputs draw a current of
less than 1.6 mA.
For details about the input burdens, please refer to the topic DIU211 Input Burden in this
chapter.
For more installation data about this board, please refer to the topic, MiCOM 264 Computer:
Configuration.
C264P/EN TD/C80 Technical Data
Description Values
Nominal operating voltage range 24 thru 250VDC / 230 VAC
Make 5A
Carry 5A continuously
30A for 500 ms or 250 A for 30 ms
Break DC: 50 W resistive, 15 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
AC: 1250 VA resistive, 1250 VA inductive (cos ϕ = 0.7)
In these conditions, the contact resistance is still lower
than 250 m for 10000 operations
Operating time Break < 7 ms
8 simple pole contacts Normally open
2 double pole contacts 1 Normally open +1 Normally close
For use with CPU 2 board, use a four-position header and jumper to select the address of
the board.
For use with CPU 3 board, the location of the DOU201 in the C264 rack defines the address
of the board. If you use the DOU201 as a spare of a previous board, you can use the jumper
to define the address of the board. Use the PACiS tool, System Configuration Editor (SCE)
to define this location.
Dielectric strength of the coil contacts: 5000Vrms.
For more installation data about this board, please refer to the topic, MiCOM 264 Computer:
Configuration
Technical Data C264P/EN TD/C80
Type Ranges
Current input range ±1mA
±5 mA
±10 mA
±20 mA
+ 4mA thru +20mA
Voltage input range ± 1,25V
±2,5V
±5V
± 10V
Sampling period 100 ms
Accuracy 0,1% full scale at 25°C
AD conversion 16 bits (15bits+sign bit)
Common mode rejection ratio (CMMR) > 100dB
Serial mode rejection ratio (SMMR) > 40dB
Range of Gain: user-selectable 1, 2, 4, 16
Input impedance for voltage inputs 11 KΩ
Input impedance for current inputs 75 Ω
Type Ranges
Current input range ±1mA
±5 mA
±10 mA
±20 mA
+ 4mA thru +20mA
Sampling period 100 ms
Accuracy 0,1% full scale for each range at 25°C
AD conversion 16 bits (15 bits+sign bit)
Common mode rejection ratio (CMMR) > 100dB
50Hz, 60Hz
Serial mode rejection ratio (SMMR) > 40dB
Input impedance for current inputs 75 Ω
Operating range
Description
1A 5A
Nominal AC current (In) 1Arms 5Arms
Minimum measurable current with same accuracy 0.1 A r m s 0.5 A r m s
Maximum measurable current 40 A r m s (4*In) 200 A r m s (4*In)
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz ± 10% 50 or 60 Hz ± 10%
Values
Pass band 10th harmonic
Current threshold accuracy 2%
Compatibility with external transformer 5VA 5P10
In addition, and specific for the 3 phase current inputs for each CT:
Operating range
Description
1A 5A
3 phase current inputs 1A 5A
Power consumption < 0.05 VA < 1,25 VA
Values
Operating range 0.1 thru 40 In
Thermal heating 100 In during 1 second
30 In during 10 seconds
4 In permanent
In addition, and specific for the 1 earth current input for each CT:
Operating range
Description
1A 5A
1 earth current inputs 1A 5A
Power consumption < 0.008 VA at 0.1Ion < 0.175 VA at 0.1Ion
Values
Operating range 0.01 thru 8 Ion
2 other possibilities by cortec code:
0.002 thru 1 Ion or 0.1 thru 40 Ion
Thermal heating 100 Ion during 1 second
30 Ion during 10 seconds
4 Ion permanent
C264P/EN TD/C80 Technical Data
Strength
Duration
1A 5A
3 seconds: not measurable, with no destruction 30 A r m s (30*In) 150 A r m s (30*In)
1 second: not measurable, with no destruction 100 A r m s (100*In) 500 A r m s (100*In)
Description Values
Power consumption < 0.5 VA at 130V
Vn range 57V thru 130V
Other possibility by cortec code:
220V thru 480V
Thermal heating 2 Vn phase-neutral permanent, and
2.6 Vn phase-neutral during 10 seconds
Description Values
Width 16 bits
Conversion period < 30 µs
Scanning period 64 samples/period
Linearity error ± 2 LSB
SINAD ratio as much as 1kHz 0db
Low passed filter at 1kHz -40db/decade
Technical Data C264P/EN TD/C80
The external power supply must supply a regulated voltage of +48V±5% and a power of
10 W for each AOU200 board
For more installation data about this board, please refer to the topic, MiCOM 264 Computer:
Configuration.
For the AOU200 board, the output attributes follow:
After calibration, and at 25°C, the precision = 0,1% X (the full scale + 20%). .
Between -10°C and +70°C, the maximum deviation is <100ppm/°C.
100ms after the command, the current output is stable. The management of the AOU200
board with an RI relay shows in Figure 1. When the RI relay is in the closed position, you can
read the value.
AOUx
100 ms
10 ms 10 ms
RI relay
C0287ENa
The WatchDog relay and RI relays include the attributes that show in the table that follows:
Contact type NO
Max operating voltage 250VDC / 230VAC
2,5A continuously
Make and Carry 30A for 500ms
100A for 30ms
Break DC: 50W resistive, 15W inductive
(L/R = 40ms).
AC: 1250 VA resistive,
1250VA inductive (cosϕ = 0,7 – relay
duration is lower)
Operating time < 7ms
Maximum frequency of commutation 360 operations each hour, on nominal load
100 000 operations, on resistive load at
Life Period
250VAC, 8A
Technical Data C264P/EN TD/C80
5. BURDENS
5.1 Auxiliary Voltage
The MiCOM C264/C264C computer burdens depend on the number of cards installed in the
computer and show in the table that follows:
Nominal
50% of the DI Maximum
Computer Version Case Size Voltage energized and All DI and all relays
one relay per board energized
energized
C264 A01 24VDC 30VADC 39VADC 39WAC 31WAC
C264 A02 48 thru 60VDC 35VADC NA NA 36WAC
C264 A03 C264 (4U – 80TE) 110 thru 125VDC
C264 A04 220VDC and 39VADC NA NA 40WAC
230VAC
The CCU200 board burden on the internal 5V bus is 400mW plus 400mW for each activated
relay.
For the CCU211 board, the input burden on the internal 5V bus is 290mW plus 400mW for
each activated relay.
35
30
25
Current (mA)
20
15
10
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Tension (V)
C0159ENa
6. ACCURACY
For all specified accuracy, the repeatability is ± 2.5% unless otherwise specified.
If no range is specified for the validity of the accuracy, then the specified accuracy shall be
valid over the full setting range.
6.1 Reference Conditions
7. TYPE TESTS
7.1 Dielectric Strength Tests
7.1.1 AIU211 – Dielectric Strength Test
Dielectric Strength IEC 60255-5 (2000) 50Hz for 1 minute, 2kV (CM),
IEEE C37.90 (1989)
Impulse Voltage Strength
IEC 60255-5 (2000) 5kV (CM)
for inputs of the AIU211
Insulation Resistance IEC 60255-5 (2000) 100 MΩ at 500 VDC (CM and DM)
(between groups)
BLANK PAGE
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
MiCOM C264P
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3. COMMUNICATIONS 27
3.1 Telecontrol bus - TBUS 28
3.2 Legacy bus - LBUS 28
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
5. DATA PROCESSING 43
5.1 Binary Input processing 43
5.1.1 Binary Input definition 43
5.1.2 Processing of Single Point Status 44
5.1.3 Processing of Double Point Status 46
5.1.4 Processing of Multiple Point Status 50
5.1.5 System Inputs 51
5.1.6 IED inputs 52
5.1.7 Group processing 52
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
6. CONTROL SEQUENCES 65
6.1 Description 65
6.1.1 General 65
6.1.2 Control sequence phase management 66
6.1.3 Direct Execute mode 69
6.1.4 SBO once mode 70
6.1.5 SBO many mode 73
6.1.6 Generic selection checks 75
6.1.7 Selection behaviour 79
6.1.8 Generic execution checks 80
6.1.9 Execution behaviour 80
6.1.10 Controls time sequencing 81
6.1.11 How an xPS starts a control sequence 84
6.2 Control of non synchronised breakers 88
6.2.1 Non synchronised circuit breaker features 88
6.2.2 Control sequence of non-synchronised circuit breakers 88
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
7. AUTOMATIONS 108
7.1 Built-in Automation functions 108
7.1.1 Auto-Recloser (AR) 108
7.1.2 Trip Circuit Supervision 114
7.1.3 Circuit breaker condition monitoring (I²t) 116
7.2 Interlocking: logical equations 117
7.2.1 Interlocking: Inputs 118
7.2.2 Interlocking:Outputs 118
7.2.3 Interlocking: Control 118
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
• Direct process interface through Digital Inputs (DI), Digital Outputs (DO), Analogue Inputs
(AI), Analogue Outputs (AO) and Current Transformer (CT)/Voltage Transformer (VT)
boards
• Direct Operator Interface (OI)
• Enhanced inner management with database management, self-test controls and the
capability to synchronize all of the devices.
The components of the software management include:
• Communications with the Telecontrol Bus (TBUS), Station Bus (SBUS) and Legacy Bus
(LBUS). Please refer to the Communications (CT) chapter
− Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) for all C264 computers except the C264
Standalone computer
⇒ Auto-Recloser (AR)
⇒ xPS/xPC Association
⇒ Pole Discrepancy
1.2 C264 Standalone
The C264 Standalone computer includes the ISAGRaF and PSL automations.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
• Initialisation mode
• Operational mode
− Normal mode
− Downgraded mode
• Maintenance mode
• Test mode
• Faulty mode
• Halt mode
Computer faults include:
• Anomaly: a fault that causes a downgrade in the behaviour of the computer. There are
hardware and/or software anomalies, as follows:
− Board failure
− Loss of synchronisation
− Loss of communication.
• Software fault: a major software error causes a software fault, that causes the computer
to go into the Faulty mode.
• Vital hardware fault: a fault that causes a software halt, that causes the computer to stop
the application software. Vital hardware faults include:
− CPU fault
− Bus fault
⇒ To determine the number and the type of the installed input and output boards
⇒ To do a check for the presence of the previously installed input and output
boards and to determine if a board is absent
⇒ To do a check for the serviceability of the installed input and output boards and to
determine if a board is unserviceable
− Communication boards: the computer performs this test within the communication
protocol
− Displays, such as the LCD and LEDs: the computer does a single test for the
presence of the HMI board
− Peripheral devices, such as the printer, external clock, and so on: the computer uses
timeouts to do a check for the presence of the peripheral devices.
If one of these non-vital hardware tests fails, the computer goes into the related downgraded
mode.
In the Normal mode, you can use the local Human Machine Interface (HMI) or upper level
maintenance request, to request a transition to the Maintenance mode.
In the Normal mode, you can use the local (HMI) or upper level simulation request, to request a
transition to the Test mode.
In the Normal mode, you can do these database operations:
• Download a standby database
• Modify a database
• Modify a database
.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
Major
automatic hardware
reset fault Init OK manual reset
hardware test OK
and coherency not OK
FAULTY
no DB
major hardware fault major hardware fault
or software fault or software fault
vital
hardware vital hardware
fault vital hardware fault fault
vital hardware fault
HALT
Counter of faults = Max_Fault
C0288ENa
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
− DI1/DO1 to indicate the Active Status: DO1 is closed if the computer is Active
The algorithm to elect the Active computer shows in the table that follows.
The initial state is “Initialisation” (state 0) and the “DI1≠1” event is generated.
“L_IS” is the internal status of the computer, “R_IS” is the internal status of the redundant
one.
The “confirmed DI2 ≠ 1” event is a detection of a Station Bus failure on the other computer
(DI2 = 0) confirmed during 20 seconds.
T1 is the timer of Active status confirmation during the computer initialisation (default value:
5 seconds for the Main 1 computer, marked in configuration, 30 seconds for the Main 2
computer). T2 is the timer of master election (default value: 5 seconds).
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
“confirmed” / / ≠ T2 timer / / /
DI2≠1 launching
≠ close DO1
≠ go to state 3
End of / not possible not possible not possible not possible open DO1 if
standby mode conditions to enter
going-on standby mode are
not true anymore
then
≠ T2 timer
launching
≠ go to state 3
else
≠ go to state 2
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
• Use the PACiS tool, the System Management Tool (SMT) to download the database
thru the IEC61850 station bus (SBUS).
• Use the PACiS tool, the Computer Administration Tool (CAT), to download the
database directly over Ethernet. Operators generally use the CAT only for the
download of the first database. During the download, the CAT sends the database to
all of the other racks. This database becomes the new Standby database. At the
Switch command, the computer cascades the switch operation to the other racks.
From SCADA, the standalone computer receives the database file and saves it in RAM, but
does not send it to the other racks.
On the standalone computer, the database status shows only on the main rack LCD.
If the main database on the main 1 rack is compatible with the standby database on the
other rack, the computer switches the database.
At any moment, the computer stores as many as two DBs in its flash memory. The two DBs
and their related VDBS have the labels DB1, VDBS1; and DB2, VDBS2.
Each database of the computer, DB1 and DB2, has one of the states that follow:
• Missing: the DB is not present in the flash memory of the computer
• Standby: the DB was downloaded into the non volatile memory of the computer, but
the software does not acknowledge this version
• Current Modified: the DB had a change to a parameter setting and the software
currently acknowledges the DB
• Standby Modified: the DB had a change to a parameter setting and the software does
not acknowledge the DB.
In the computer, the life cycle of the DBs shows in the figure that follows:
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
Absent
Downloading
Switching
Standby Current
Parameter setting
Parameter setting
Standby Current
Modified Modified
Switching
C0308ENa
A file descriptor with the label DB context, stored in the flash memory of the computer,
includes the configuration of the DB installed on the device. This file descriptor, that includes
the state of each of the two databases and their related VDBS (for example, DB1 and
VDBS1; DB2 and VDBS2), allows you to know the configuration of the databases at the
moment of the computer boot (initialisation mode), and to start again with the Current
database, if it exists. To update the file descriptor DB Context, use these functions:
• Download a database
• Check a database
• Modify a Database.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
SWITCH
T0 T0 + T1
T0 + T1 MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
T0 + T1 CURRENT STAND-BY
DB2 DB1
OPERATIONAL
C0309ENa
− SBUS or LBUS for all C264 computers except C264 Standalone computers
• To synchronise other devices through the SBUS with the local clock
You can synchronize the local clock with an external time reference from four sources:
• SCADA sends a clock message through the TBUS and through the gateway1
• The system master clock sends a clock message through the SBUS - SNTP 2
1
For all C264 computers
2
For all C264 computers except C264 Standalone computers
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
There is a priority rule for these four external time references. If the external clock operates,
it locks out changes from the three other sources: you cannot make modifications to the local
clock in these ways:
• Locked out: SCADA sends a clock message through the TBUS and through the
gateway
• Locked out: The system master clock sends a clock message through the SBUS
− no radio received
• An indication that the local clock was roughly synchronised. This indication shows any
time difference, between the local clock and the clock synchronisation message, that
is greater than the fixed value: Δthreshold = 20 millisecond. The computer sends a
message about the discrepancy, prints the message, and archives the event.
• Indication that the operator performed a manual time set. This “manual time set”
indication is required to time-tag the events that occur.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
The internal time format for the local clock is Universal Time Coordinate (UTC). The time
difference between UTC and the local time is set during configuration.
The local clock operates automatically:
• For all dates including leap years thru to 2037.
• For seasonal time changes: it uses the values for Daylight Savings Time (DST) as
shown in the Time Zone Adjustment Table (TZTAB) file. The TZTAB file shows the
differences between UTC and local time.
If the DST rules change, you can set the new rules in the computer.
The computer manages the milliseconds with its own quartz.
The Local Clock Update function manages the synchronisation status of the computer as
follows:
• Not synchronized: this is the status at initialization, the computer has never been
synchronized since booting or rebooting. Date and time are invalid.
• Synchronized: the computer receives periodically the date and time. Date and time
are valid. Or the computer is master clock on the Ethernet network for other
equipment.
At initialisation, the computer shows the external clock as not-synchronised with the local
clock. This status remains the same until you send a control message to the initialisation
driver to receive synchronisation frames from an external time reference. When the control is
OK and at the reception of the first external clock message, the synchronisation upon
external clock is declared valid and the external clock is considered connected.
This synchronisation with the external clock could fall back to invalid: for example, in event
the computer did not receive an external synchronisation message for N minute(s). This can
indicate an external clock failure, such as a disconnect or a message that contains invalid
data. The value of this timing is 300 seconds.
In event of an external clock failure, the local clock maintains the frequency in effect before
the external clock failed. The computer generates an internal signal or alarm and declares
the system master clock invalid. When this occurs, the computer makes a non-
synchronisation mark against each event, for as long as the synchronisation with the
external clock remains invalid.
When a device on the SBUS does not receive a clock synchronisation message in 180
seconds, it raises an alarm. The events processed by this device are tagged with a special
mark and with the time, and the device stops the transmission of the synchronization frame
to the IEDs.
2.4.6 Management of loss of external time reference
As the local clock update function receives the external time reference, it manages a loss of
the external time reference as follows:
• If the external clock is lost, then the local clock update shows the loss of the external
clock
• If the clock message from the SCADA gateway is lost, then the local clock update
shows the loss of the SCADA gateway clock message
• If the system master clock is lost, then the local clock update shows the loss of the
system master clock
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
4. If [C Local – C External] ≤ Δ Threshold (20 ms), the value of the local clock is
progressively corrected (reduced or increased). This compensation is performed in a
set time (t1=60 s).
5. If [C Local – C External] ≥ Δ Threshold (20 ms), the hour in the local clock is updated
roughly.
If an operator gets the external clock time, the operator must update the local clock.
2.4.8 Limits and performances
The computer local clock has a small drift per day. This quartz drift, that is the deviation of
the internal oscillator of the computer, is less than 0,5 s/day (that is, ≤ 5,8 μs/s). This quartz
drift is the same through the entire operating temperature range of the computer. The
operator must set the time periodically or synchronize the local clock with a master clock.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
3. COMMUNICATIONS
MiCOM C264/ C264C includes different types of communications:
FIGURE 5: COMMUNICATIONS
• Master/slave protocols: DNP 3.0, DNP3 over IP, MODBUS, T101, HNZ-Elenas, HNZ-
Yemen
• DNP3 over IP, T104: Ethernet 10 or 100 Mb/s: RJ45 connector or optical fibre
(multimode or monomode)
On the C264, you can configure as many as 2 different serial telecontrol protocols. If you use
the Ethernet IEC 104 standard, you can connect as many as four independent clients.
CAUTION: WHEN YOU USE THE SERIAL PORTS ON THE CPU BOARD, MAKE SURE
THAT THE BAUDRATE IS THE SAME FOR BOTH CPU SERIAL PORTS:
COM3 AND COM4.
The redundancy is not available for T104, DNP3 over IP, and MODBUS.
3.2 Legacy bus - LBUS
C264 behaves as a master.
Protocols:
• ModBus
• DNP 3.0
Devices connected to: IEDs
Physical layer:
• Optical fibre
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
CAUTION: WHEN YOU USE THE SERIAL PORTS ON THE CPU BOARD, MAKE
SURE THAT THE BAUDRATE IS THE SAME FOR BOTH CPU SERIAL
PORTS: COM3 AND COM4.
CAUTION: IF THE MAIN 1 RACK IS REDUNDANT, THERE IS NO LBUS
CONNECTED TO THE MAIN 1 RACK.
CAUTION: THERE IS NO REDUNDANCY FOR THE LBUS
On the C264, as many as four serial ports are available to make four networks with as many
as four different protocols.
3.3 Station bus - SBUS
The S-BUS Protocol is used for PACiS subsystems communication but it is also available for
other equipment.
A C264 computer behaves mainly as a server but it can be also a client of other C264
computers (distributed automations) or IEC 61850 IED.
Protocol:
• IEC 61850
Devices connected to:
• SWR with 4 RJ45 ports and 2 optical ports for a redundant ring (multimode or
monomode)
3.3.1 Exchanges
C264 computer acquires and sends data on IEC-61850 network using two mechanisms:
• REPORT
• GOOSE
The REPORT is specific between a server and one client, it provides:
• data value
• data state or quality attribute (validity and several kind of invalid state)
• time tag quality attribute (server synchronised or not when event has occurred)
Data quality defines if data is valid or several kind of invalidity: unknown when disconnected,
Saturated, Undefined… REPORTS are sent/received with their RFI (Reason For Inclusion):
periodic, spontaneous state/value change or following control.
The GOOSE is a short message (data value and quality) sent in multicast to all SBUS
equipment, this is quicker than Report.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
3.3.3 Controls
C264 supports Common Data Classes control expressed with SPC, DPC, INC and APC
configured as Direct Execute or SBO.
3.4 Ethernet port management on CPU Type 3, CPU 270
The 2 CPU Type 3 Ethernet ports can be configured as follows:
TABLE 2
IEC 61850 Station Bus, if configured, is always on port 1
One or 2 IP SCADA protocols can be configured on port 1 and/or 2
The existing IS SCADA protocols are DNP3 and T104. DNP3 is mono-client. T104 is multi-
clients (as many as 4 clients) with only one active at one time. Bind one protocol on one, and
only one, Ethernet port. If you use two Ethernet ports, make sure that the IP addresses of
the Ethernet ports are on two different sub-networks. The two Ethernet ports can share the
same physical network. Use the CAT tool to configure the Ethernet ports.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
• Open Circuit (AI kind 4-20 mA with current value under 4mA)
C0126ENa
Filtering time
Debouncing
time
t0 t1 t2
C0127ENa
4.4.3 Toggling
A digital input is said to be toggling if its state has changed more than N times in a given
period of time T1.
A toggling DI returns in the normal state if its state has not changed within another period of
time T2.
N, T1 and T2 are parameters determined at configuration time on a per system basis (same
parameters for all MiCOM computers of a system).
The toggle filtering applies only on DI that will be used as BI (there is no toggle filtering on DI
that will be used for counters or DM).
4.5 Counters acquisition (CT)
The counters are acquired on the same boards as the DIs. There are two types of counters
SCT (Single counter) and DCT (Double counters).
This interface allows acquisitions of pulses delivered from energy metering devices
corresponding to a calibrated quantity of energy.
Each valid pulse increments the value of an accumulator used to compute the quantity of
energy delivered during a given period.
Counter values are stored in static memory (secured with a capacitor, > 48h autonomy) ;
The counters are kept for more than 48H when the C264 power supply is off.
The pulse frequency should be 20 Hz as a maximum. So, the debouncing and filtering
values must be chosen in consequence.
You can acquire as many as 16 counters (wired) for each Extension Rack. The maximum
acquisition frequency does not exceed 20 Hz and the total frequency for the 16 counters
does not exceed 160Hz.
You can define a maximum of 128 counters for a complete C264. You can wire as many as
eight counters on the main 1 rack with no modifications.
4.5.1 Single counter (SCT)
An SCT is acquired on a single contact.
The value of the accumulator is incremented after a low to high transition, confirmed after a
filtering time (Tcount). Tcount is defined for the whole system, with a step of 5 ms: the chosen
value must be coherent with the pulse frequency (that is, all counters of a system use the
same Tcount).
A subsequent pulse can be taken into account only after a high to low transition.
Tcount Tcount
Transition validated,
Low to high transition
counter is incremented
Transition discarded
Low to high transition
C0128ENa
CC
Tstab
Tstab
Bit change => new Bit change => Bit change =>
calculation new calculation new calculation
Δ≤V stab=> confirmed Δ>V stab => Tstab Δ>V stab => Tstab
DM value launched re-launched
Furthermore, an invalidity processing is applied: at the first change of state of one bit
following a confirmed DM value, the TInv delay is launched (value defined in configuration,
from 0 to 300s, with a 10 ms step). If the value is not confirmed at the end of this delay, the
DM is declared UNDEFINED.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
TInv
Confirmed
DM value DM UNDEFINED
Tstab
Tstab
Tstab
TInv
Confirmed
DM value DM UNDEFINED
Ts tab
Tstab
Tstab
If Vstab is equal to 0, there is no stability processing: all DM values are sent at each
calculation.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
Tinh Tinh
RI
You can use one supplementary bit for the sign (0 indicates a positive value, 1 indicates a
negative value).
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
• DOU201 boards for alarms (8 normal open DOs + 2 normal open/normal close DOs).
4.9 Digital Setpoints: SPS, DPS, MPS
Digital setpoints are digital values sent on multiple parallel wired outputs. Each wired output
represents a bit of the value. Digital setpoints are used to send instruction values to the
process or to auxiliary devices.
The Digital Setpoints are processed on the same boards as the Digital Outputs. The Digital
Outputs characteristics described above apply on Digital Setpoints. Use only standard DO
boards with single pole N/O relays.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
4.9.1 Encoding
The codes that follow are allowed:
• Wait for N ms
• Wait for N ms
• ± 5 mA, 0 - 5 mA
• ± 10 mA, 0 - 10 mA
• 4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, ± 20 mA
4.10.2 Output management
Each current output is individually managed in 2 modes:
• Maintained mode: in event of computer shut down or power off, the output level is
maintained (and the Read inhibit relay is set). Only the reception of a new setpoint will
lead to an output value modification.
• Un-maintained Mode: in event of computer shut down or power off, the output is set
to 0.
The Analog Output is stable 100ms after the order. During the Analog output value
modification, the “Read Inhibit” relay is reset (Open) and indicates that the analog output
value is not to be used.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
Analog
Output
100 ms
10ms 10ms
Set
RI relay
status Reset
C0289ENa
• The C264 is not operational or powered off (no communication with the CPU board)
5. DATA PROCESSING
MiCOM C264 treatment entries can be Binary Inputs or Analogue Inputs. They are issued
from
• IO boards
• System Input (SI): information related to the system, to configurable and built-in
automations or to electrical process but without acquisition possibilities
5.1.1.2 Suppression
A binary input can be suppressed by an order issued from an operator. No subsequent
change of state on a suppressed BI can trigger any action e.g. display, alarm, transmission.
The BI takes the “SUPPRESSED” state. When the operator unsuppresses the BI, this one
takes its actual state.
5.1.1.3 Substitution
A BI can be substituted to a manual set state by an operator (state “SUBSTITUTED xxx”).
The BI stays in the state determined by the operator until he unsubstitutes it. When a BI is
substituted, no changes of state are transmitted, and computations, for instance groupings,
are made with the substituted state. When the BI is unsubstituted, the actual state is
transmitted to higher control levels and subsequent changes of state are transmitted again.
5.1.1.4 Forcing
When an information is invalid (i.e. SELFCHECK FAULTY, TOGGLING, UNDEFINED or
UNKNOWN), it can be manually forced by an operator (state “FORCED xxx”). This feature is
similar to the substitution but the information is automatically updated when valid information
is available again. A SUPPRESSED or SUBSTITUTED datapoint cannot be forced. The
forcing could also be automatic: in this case, the invalid information is automatically replaced
by the state defined in configuration.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
5.1.1.5 Transmission
By configuration, a BI could be transmitted on a client-server basis on the station bus using
the two modes:
• Report based mode: in this mode, a confirmed change of status is spontaneously
transmitted to the subscribers with the time stamping and the reason for change. The
Report mode is used to transmit filtered data for displaying, printing and archiving.
• GOOSE based mode: in this mode, the change of status is transmitted in multicast to
the configured receivers. On IEC61850 network, all types of BI can be transmitted
using GOOSE. Only the BI unfiltered states are transmitted with their time stamping,
the reason for change is not. The GOOSE mode is used to transmit data as soon as
possible after their acquisition and as quickly as possible, for automation purpose.
During a loss of communication, the events detected on the computer are not buffered.
DI/DO
association
Group
processing
From Toggle
acquisition filtering Manual
suppression Persistance
filtering Transmission – To RCP
Substitution Report based To HMI
From IED IED To Printer
inputs To Archive
Forcing
System
Inputs
Transmission –
GOOSE based To
automation
C0133ENa
For automation (interlock, PSL, PLC, and built in functions), GOOSE are used. Each valid
state (01, 10 and 00) is configurable to be seen by automation in False, True or Invalid sate.
TS TS
TR TR
SET
SP before filtering
RESET
SET
SP after filtering, mode 1
RESET
SET
SP after filtering, mode 2
RESET
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7
Close DI/DO
contact association
From Toggle
acquisition filtering Group
processing
Open Persistance
Manual
contact Toggle filtering
suppression
From filtering Motion
acquisition filtering
Substitution
Transmission – To RCP
Report based To HMI
From IED IED Forcing
To Printer
inputs To Archive
System
Inputs
Transmission –
GOOSE based To
automation
C0134ENa
DPS are commonly used for all switchgears position. From board valid acquisition the two
contacts are Close and Open (set by configuration when voltage is present). The position of
the switch is:
Preliminary treatment (filtering) for some DPs is applied to filter the MOTION state during a
certain period of time. This avoids the transmission of this (normally) transient state.
This treatment is said to be a motion filtering.
The time tag is user-selectable:
• Mode 1: the valid state (OPEN or CLOSE) is stamped with the time of the beginning of
the MOTION state
• Mode 2: the valid state (OPEN or CLOSE) is stamped with the time of this valid
transition
This time stamping can be superseded if a persistence filtering applies.
If the MOTION state is confirmed, it is always stamped with the time of the beginning of the
MOTION state. Furthermore, the BI takes the state JAMMED (in case of confirmed
MOTION00 state) or UNDEFINED (in case of confirmed MOTION11 state). In this case, the
following valid state (OPEN or CLOSE) is always time-stamped with the time of this valid
transition (depending on the persistence filtering feature).
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
• Mode 2: the valid state (OPEN or CLOSE) is stamped with the time of this valid
transition
This time stamping can be superseded if a persistence filtering apply.
If the MOTION state is confirmed, it is always stamped with the time of the beginning of the
MOTION state. Furthermore, the BI takes the state JAMMED (in case of confirmed
MOTION00 state) or UNDEFINED (in case of confirmed MOTION11 state). In this case, the
following valid state (OPEN or CLOSE) is always time-stamped with the time of this valid
transition (depending of the persistence filtering feature).
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
OPEN
CLOSE
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8
• t0 : MOTION00 transition
• t1 : MOTION00 state not confirmed, CLOSE state time-stamped t0 if mode 1, t1 if mode 2
(if no persistence filtering applies)
• t2 : MOTION00 transition
• t3 : MOTION00 state confirmed, state JAMMED time-stamped t2
• t4 : OPEN transition, time-stamped t4 whatever was the mode (if no persistence filtering applies)
• t5 : MOTION11 transition
• t6 : MOTION11 state not confirmed
• t7 : MOTION11 transition
• t8 : MOTION11 state confirmed, state UNDEFINED time-stamped t8 C0311ENa
TO TO
OPEN
TC TC
CLOSE
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7
• t0 : CLOSE transition
• t1 : CLOSE state not confirmed
• t2 : CLOSE transition
• t3 : CLOSE state confirmed (stamped t2 if mode 1, stamped t3 if mode 2)
• t4 : OPEN transition
• t5 : OPEN state not confirmed
• t6 : OPEN transition
• t7 : OPEN state confirmed (stamped t6 if mode 1, stamped t7 if mode 2)
C0312ENa
contact 1
Toggle
From
filtering
acquisition
contact N Manual
Toggle suppression
From
filtering
acquisition Transmission –
Substitution MP filtering Report based
Forcing
System
Inputs
C0135ENa
Time-out Time-out
undefined
MP before
filtering
valid
undefined
MP after
filtering valid
C0253ENa
NOT
SET RESET
RESET SET
INVALID INVALID
SUPPRESSED SUPPRESSED
SP and SI from different hierarchical levels can be mixed, for instance a group at substation
computer level can be composed of SP acquired at bay computer level or at substation
computer level.
A group is time stamped with the date / time of the last datapoint which has modified the
group status.
5.1.8 SBMC Mode Processing
When a Bay is in SBMC mode (Site Based Maintenance Control), the status of the Binary
Inputs (associated to this Bay and defined as “SBMC dependant”), takes the forced state
defined in the configuration.
This forced information is delivered to the Remote Control Point (RCP) as long as the SBMC
mode is active on the Bay.
For a group a special feature is implemented: a BI belonging to a group, which is dependent
of SBMC bay state, is not taken into account in group computation if the bay is set in SBMC
mode. If all the BI of a group belong to one or more bays, which are all in SBMC mode, the
group is then in the suppressed state. At the end of a bay SBMC mode, all groups owning BI
of this bay are re-computed.
5.1.9 BI sent to automatism features
In case of automatism running on a client computer, with BI information coming from a
server computer, BI are generally transmitted in the GOOSE based mode. In some cases
where the GOOSE based mode is not used, BI information received by IEC61850 reports
must be used in automatism features.
In any cases where GOOSE based mode and report based mode are used at the same time,
the BI information used is the one receive by GOOSE (faster transmission than reports).
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
from IED
acquisition
Manual
suppression
from CT/VT CT/VT
Substitution
acquisition calculations
Forcing
Transmission
to:
RCP
HMI
Printer
Archive
Automation
C0136ENb
5.2.2 Scaling
The real value represented by the measurement can be computed by a linear or a quadratic
transformation:
• Linear, multisegments
• Quadratic
Value = A X +B or
Value = AX + B
Transformation law and A / B coefficients are defined in configuration.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
Y
Zero value
X Y
suppression
- deadband/2
+ deadband/2
C0360ENa
upper
HYST
t3 t4
t1 t2
HYST
lower
5.2.6 Substitution
The value of a measurement can be substituted by an operator (state “SUBSTITUTED”,
value defined by the operator). The measurement stays in this state until he unsubstitutes it.
When a measurement is substituted, no changes of value nor state are transmitted, and
computations are made with the substituted state. When the measurement is unsubstituted,
the actual state and value are transmitted to higher control levels and subsequent changes
of state and value are transmitted again.
State Meaning
VALID Not in one of the following states
SELFCHECK FAULTY AI, DI board fault
SUBSTITUTED Operator action set MV value as valid state
FORCED Automatic valid state and configured value when AI is invalid
SUPPRESSED Operator set MV in this invalid state
UNKNOWN MV is acquired via a transmission link, and the link is
disconnected
SATURATED MV is beyond its nominal input range
UNDEFINED MV is Digital Measurement with invalid coding or computation on
analogue leads to error
OPEN CIRCUIT MV is DC 4-20 mA with input value under 4mA
OVERSHOOT[1..3] One of the 3 overshoot values has been cross
UNDERSHOOT[1..3] One of the 3 undershoot values has been cross
5.2.9 Transmission
The measurement value and state are transmitted on a client-server basis on the Ethernet
IEC-61850 network, using only the report mechanism and Common Data Classes MV, WYE
and DEL.
During a loss of communication between a client and a server, all server measurements are
set to UNKNOWN on the client.
The measurement information transmitted in a report are:
• the real value (i.e. after scaling)
• the reason for change, which could be one of the below values:
− cyclic change (set if the measurement value has changed, without modification of
the resulting state)
A Measurement value can be transmitted periodically or upon variation (% of nominal), and
anyway on state change.
ΔV is theThe minimal variation ΔV is computed either from the last transmitted value (mode
1) or from the full scale value (mode 2):
ΔV = (p/1000) % * |Vt| where p is a value in the range 0 .. 100 and Vt is the last transmitted
value.
or
ΔV = (p/1000) % * |Vmax| where p is a value in the range 0 .. 100 and Vmax is the full scale
value.
for both modes p is in the range 0 .. 255.
• To make the galvanic insulation between the high voltage part and the measurand and
protection circuits,
• To protect the measurand circuits against damage when a fault comes onto the high
voltage network.
On the output of the CT / VT inputs acquisitions function, I and V signals issued by the CT
and the VT are represented by samples.
The CT/VT calculation function carries out basic mathematical processing on the memorised
samples and gives derived values from I and V such as power, frequency, … This function
then makes it possible to place useful quantities at the disposal of the computer and the
user.
This function is used or computation of measures used for protection modules (overcurrent,
min/max voltage, frequency, etc…) or as information (measurements) for the operator.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
5.2.10.1 Inputs
The inputs of the CT/VT Calculation function, issued from the conventional CT/VT inputs,
are:
• In case of star coupling:
− Samples of Ia
− Samples of Va
− Samples of Ib
− Samples of Vb
− Samples of Ic
− Samples of Vc
− Samples of V0 (Vr)
− Samples of Iab
− Samples of Ibc
− Samples of Vab
− Samples of Vbc
− Samples of Vca
− Samples of V0 (Vr)
5.2.10.2 Outputs
The CT/VT calculation functionality provides:
• RMS values, for currents and voltages
• Frequency of the network
• Active power (total and on a per phase basis)
• Reactive power (total and on a per phase basis)
• Apparent power (total and on a per phase basis)
• Power factor (total and on a per phase basis)
• Phase angles
• Sequence components (Id, Ii, I0, Vd, Vi, V0)
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
5.2.10.3 Behaviour
5.2.10.3.1 Principle
The use of power electronics distorts what would ideally be a perfect sine wave. These
distortions are called harmonics. Each individual harmonic has a sine wave shape. The order
of the harmonic is defined by the frequency of the harmonic divided by basic frequency (50 /
60 Hz).
5.2.10.3.2 Calculation of measurements
Let N be the number of samples recovered for one period of the signal (i.e. 64 samples per
period whatever the network frequency).
All these samples must be gathered in a revolving list stored in active memory. There is thus
in memory an active list of k.N elements. k is the number of sample channels.
Types
The following primary measurements shall be derived directly from sample values:
• Vars (Using Active Power calculation method with the voltage samples retarded by
90°)
The following measurements shall be obtained from the Fourier of sample values or the
Fourier values of the above-derived measurements.
• Magnitudes.
• Phase angles.
• Power Factor.
• VA.
Algorithms
Frequency
The frequency is directly computed through the timer frequency.
Fast Fourier Transform
At each period, the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is performed. This gives (between other
things) the value of the phase angle and the magnitude of the fundamental.
RMS values
1 63
Vrms = ∑ Vi ²
64 i =0
Powers
1 63
Active power: P = ∑ Vi I i
64 i =0
1 63
Reactive power: Q = ∑ Vi I i−16
64 i =0
NOTE: The reactive power is computed by taking the values of the current a
quarter of period before (sin(x) = cos (x – pi/2)
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
Apparent power: S = P² + Q²
P
Power factor: cos(ϕ ) =
S
Q
Angle: ϕ = tan −1 ( )
P
Harmonics
Harmonic values are directly issued from the FFT.
Sequence components
The sequence component computation is based on the fundamental values of phase and
magnitude (from the FFT), i.e. its imaginar and real part.
• Direct component
Re( direct ) = × (Re( A) + Re( B) × cos(120) − Im(B) × sin(120) + Re(C ) × cos(120) + Im(C ) × sin(120) )
1
3
Im(direct ) = × (Im( A) + Im( B) × cos(120) + Re( B) × sin(120) + Im(C ) × cos(120) − Re(C ) × sin(120) )
1
3
• Inverse component
Re( direct ) = × (Re( A) + Re( B) × cos(120) + Im(B) × sin(120) + Re(C ) × cos(120) − Im(C ) × sin(120) )
1
3
Im(direct ) = × (Im( A) + Im(B) × cos(120) − Re( B) × sin(120) + Im(C ) × cos(120) + Re(C ) × sin(120) )
1
3
• Homopolar component
• Up to fifteenth harmonic
− Decimal
− Gray
− BCD
5.3.2 Acquisition from Analogue Inputs
The tap position is acquired by measuring a current input.
A minimum value Imin (mA) corresponds to the lowest position 1 of the tap , and a maximum
value Imax corresponds to the highest value N.
The input current should take only discrete values: Ik =Imin + (K -1)(Imax_Imin)/(N-1) , with
K the position of the tap.
However the tap is considered in the position K if the current is in the range [Ik-ΔI/2 ..
Ik+ΔI/2], with ΔI = N% of (Imax – Imin). The N percentage is defined in configuration.
The tap position is considered UNDEFINED outside of this range.
State Comment
VALID not in one of the below states
SELFCHECK FAULTY Due to an AI board fault or a DI board fault
SUBSTITUTED See § 4.4
FORCED
SUPPRESSED
UNKNOWN If the tap position is acquired via a transmission link, the
information is unknown when the link is disconnected.
UNDEFINED Due to a wrong encoding for a digital acquisition, or a saturation,
an open-circuit or an out-of-range value for an analogue
acquisition
OVERSHOOT[1..3] It exists 3 “Overshoot” states, one for each upper threshold
violation. Only one could be set at one time
UNDERSHOOT[1..3] It exists 3 “Undershoot” states, one for each lower threshold
violation. Only one could be set at one time
5.3.7 Transmission
The TPI are transmitted on a client-server basis on the IEC-61850 network using the report
mechanism.
During a loss of communication between a client and a server, all server TPI are set to
UNKNOWN on the client.
The TPI is transmitted as soon as a value change or a status change is detected. The TPI
information transmitted in a report are:
• the TPI value
• the resulting state (mapped on the quality field on UCA2)
• the time stamping (in GMT time) and time quality
• the reason for change, which could be one of the below values:
− change of data (set if the value has changed)
− change of quality (set if the quality has changed)
− change due to control (set if the state or quality change is due to a control)
5.4 Accumulator Input Processing
The accumulator stores its current value in a static memory volatile memory (secured with a
capacitor, >48h autonomy). At configured sample an accumulated value is extracted for
inner computation and transmission (Common Data Class BCR on IEC 61850).
Digital Inputs are used to count pulses. There is Single counter (SCT) based on one DI and
Double Counter (DCT) based on two DIs which count complementary states.
At processing level special persistent and complementary filters eliminate non-stable pulses.
The integer counter (also transmitted) can be scaled (among of energy of valid pulse).
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
E = ∑ Ei
⎛ ( M + M i −1 ) (ti − ti −1 ) ⎞
Ei = S f * ⎜ i * ⎟
⎝ 2 3600 ⎠
With:
E = total Energy counter value (continuous register)
Ei = Integration result at time ti
Sf = Scaling Factor (defined during the configuration phase)
Mi = absolute value of the Measurement at time ti
ti – ti-1 = 1 second
For a given measurement, the integration can be done only after receiving two consecutive
valid values with the same sign of the measurement. The integration result (Ei) is added to
the associated export or import counter according to the sign of the measurement.
The integration is stopped as soon as the power measurement becomes invalid or changes
of sign. The integration is restarted as soon as two consecutive valid measurement values
with the same sign are received.
Current values of energy counters are stored in secured memory ( 48h autonomy when
power supply is off). Current values of energy counters can be modified by an operator.
Values of energy counters are transmitted on a client-server basis on the IEC-61850 network
using mechanism through the LN MMTR.
During a loss of communication between a client and a server, all server energy counters are
set to UNKNOWN state on the client.
WARNING: THE ENERGY COUNTER VALUES ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR BILLING
APPLICATION.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
6. CONTROL SEQUENCES
6.1 Description
A Control Sequence is a basic built-in function on a module (switch, relay, and function). It
receives control order, sending back acknowledgement. After checks, control sequence
sends control (protocol or DO), and check correct execution with feed back from protocol or
from DI.
6.1.1 General
The C264 allows the following functions:
• Control of transformers
• Control of IEDs
• Control of automatisms
These types of controls are allowed:
• “Select Before Operate once” mode” (SBO once): usually for circuits breakers and
disconnectors. The device must be selected before allowing the execution. In that
event the device is managed in two phases: selection and execution. Device
unselection is done automatically by the computer.
• “Select Before Operate many” (SBO many): usually for transformers. The device
must be selected before execute one or more controls before reaching the expected
position (low/raise). In that event the device is managed in three phases: selection,
execution and unselection. The execution phase is repeated for every new control. To
end the controls sequence, the initiator of the request must send an “unselection”
request.
By configuration, each DPC order (close order or open order) and each SPC can activate
simultaneously two DO contacts.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
• Transformers: They are managed in the three modes: “Direct Execute”, “SBO
once” and “SBO many” mode with optional hardware selection of the device in SBO
mode.
• Ancillary devices: they are usually managed in “Direct Execute” mode but can be
managed also in “SBO once” mode.
• Controls via Setpoints: are managed in “Direct Execute” mode and in “SBO once”
mode.
or
checks IED
or
System
Functional Description
controls
execution phase
Execution via
C0314ENa
selection phase execution phase
C264P/EN FT/C80
Page 67/166
Execution via
Select Before Operate mode many
I/O boards
Execution or
checks
Execution via
Page 68/166
IED
Device
Device
Selection
unselect
C264P/EN FT/C80
checks
Execution via
I/O boards
Execution
or
checks
Execution via
IED
(1) An execution phase with two execution requests is given as an example, it may have more or less
C0315ENa
MiCOM C264P
Functional Description
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
no
device direct execute
yes
execution already in
progress ?
execution in progress
Perform execution
checks
no
All checks OK
Perform execution
no
Execution OK
yes
End of
sequence
C0316ENa
Unselected
device
Selection request
no
Device selectable ?
yes
Device Already
selected
Perform Selection
no checks
All checks OK
Device selection
no
Device selection OK
send positive
acknowledge
Selection Time-out
launching
Time-out
Cancel request
Deselect hardware
selection Device
Execution request
Set “device
unselected”
send negative
acknowledge
Execution
phase
C0317ENa
yes
Execution in progress
execution in progress
to the device
Perform execution
checks
send negative
acknowledge no
All checks OK
Operator
Cancel request
Perform execution
no
Execution OK
yes
Reset execution in
progress
deselect the device
End of
sequence
C0318ENa
Wait request
Execution request
no
Device selected
yes
Execution in progress
execution in progress
to the device
Perform execution
send negative checks
acknowledge
no
All checks OK
Perform execution
no
Execution OK
yes
Reset execution in
progress
Unselection
phase
End of
sequence
C0319ENa
hardware selection
Error during
Not configured
deselection
Deselect the device
Set « device
deselected »
End of sequence
C0320ENa
• Inter-control delay
• Computer mode
• Device selectable
• Uniqueness
In event of fail, the initiator of the request may bypass the checks that follow:
• Uniqueness
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
Next diagram schematises controls and bypass according the description of the device.
yes
Computer faulty or in
maint
no
no
Interlock checks
OK Not configured
no
Bypass interlock yes
checks
yes
Not configured
Automatism running
Bypass automatism no
no
Device selectable
yes
Device locked Not configured
no
no
Bypass locked device
no Not configured
Current status of the
device OK
yes
no Uniqueness
OK Not configured
no
Bypass uniqueness yes
check
Abort
selection Continue
selection
phase
phase
C0321ENa
• Changing mode:
− From “operational” mode to “test” mode: the specific control “test” mode is
refused if at least one control is in progress.
− From “test” mode to “operational” mode: the specific control “test” mode is
refused if at least one control is in progress.
• The request is accepted only if the device is in the opposite state and valid
• The request is accepted only if the device is in the opposite state, jammed or undefined
• The request is refused only if the device is in the same state and valid. In any event, if
the request is refused, a negative acknowledgement is sent back
6.1.6.9 Uniqueness
It is possible by configuration to prevent to have more than one control at a time.
• For the whole substation
• Inside a bay
The following figure describes the algorithm used between computers.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
A
Uniqueness does not be checked for
this device or uniqueness is bypass
Uniqueness must be checked for this
device and there is no bypass
B
Uniqueness check is OK
Uniqueness check is OK
sequence. In event of fail of the execution of the selection control or if the selection
position information remains open in the given delay the selection sequence ends
abnormally sending a negative acknowledgement.
• Configuration 2:
For this configuration, in which only the output control of the selection is configured,
the computer: sends a “close” order of the selection control (via I/O boards or IED). If
the selection control has been normally executed, the selection sequence ends by
sending a positive acknowledgement and the computer start its execution sequence.
In event of fail of the execution of the selection control, the sequence ends abnormally
by sending a negative acknowledgement.
6.1.8 Generic execution checks
During the execution phase, whatever the execution mode (SBO once, SBO many or Direct
Execute) the computer, before proceeding to the execution of the request, performs the
following checks:
• Inter-control delay
• Computer mode
• Uniqueness
Execution checks and bypasses are identical to those of the selection phase. Moreover, in
event of ”SBO once” mode or ”SBO many” mode the computer verifies that the device was
previously selected.
The checks of the execution phase in “SBO many” mode are identical as above but they
are repeated for every execution request (low/raise).
In “Direct Execute” mode the device selection is not verified because it is not allowed.
• I/O boards
• IED communication
• Digital Setpoints
• Analogue Setpoints
Single Point Control and Double Point Control
However, the execution control sequence depends on the activation mode of the xPC. By
configuration, this activation mode of SPC and DPC may be “transient”, “permanent” or
“permanent until feedback until feedback”.
• Transient: the contact is closed and then re-opened automatically after a delay
(defined during the configuration of the xPC). For a DPC, configuration gives two
delays need to be configured, one for open and one for close.
• Permanent: For this type of output control, the contact is held in the requested
position state until the a reverse order is received.
• Permanent until feedback: The contact is held in the requested position state until
confirmation of the position of the device or after timeout awaiting the new position of
the device. In this event, the input information of the device status must be configured.
Digital and Analogue Setpoints
Digital Setpoints are executed via Digital Output boards. This type of control is managed in
“Direct Execute mode” only.
Analogue Setpoints are executed via Analogue Output boards. This type of control is
managed in “Direct Execute mode” only.
A C264 can have 256 numbers of Digital or Analogue Setpoints
• Device features: selection control wired/not wired, selection position wired/not wired,
device position wired/not wired and so on
DPC open
(resp. close)
Feedback Delay
CO Pulse Delay
0-60s
0-5s
3 4 5
The chronogram that follows shows an abnormal termination of Direct Execute sequence.
The device hasn’t taken the expected position in the given delay.
DPC open
(resp. close)
SPS close
(resp. open)
SPS open
(resp. close)
Feedback Delay
CO Pulse Delay
0-60s
0-5s
3 4 5
Selection of the
device
Selection position
input
Device status
Open/Close Selection
Selection
Feedback Feedback
Feedback
Selection time-out Delay Delay
Delay
0-60s
0-1 s 1-10mn 0-1 s
2 5
1 3 4
Selection phase Execution phase
C0325ENa
• Stage 2: the selection is confirmed by the associated input information in the feedback
delay (0 – 1-sec user selectable)
• Stage 3: close the device before the end of the selection timeout delay (0 – 10 MN
user selectable)
• Stage 4: the device has taken the expected position (close) in the feedback delay (0–
60 sec user selectable). The computer deselect the device (open selection output
control)
• Stage 5: confirmation of the deselecting of the device in the same given delay than
stage 2.
The chronogram that follows shows controls sequence that is aborted after time-out of the
selection delay.
• Stage 2: the selection is confirmed by the associated input information in the feedback
delay.
Selection of the
device
Output Control Of
The Device
Device status
Open/Close
Feedback
Selection time-out Delay
0-60s
1-10mn
1 2 3
Execution phase
Selection phase
C0327ENa
• Stage 2: close the device before the end of the selection timeout delay (0 – 10 MN
user selectable)
• Stage 3: The device has taken the expected position (close) in the feedback delay (0–
1-sec user selectable). The computer deselect the device (open selection output
control)
6.1.10.3 SBO many time sequencing
SBO many mode is exclusively used for control of transformers. Refer to associated section.
Value of
Activate control
xPS State xPC state Action
sequence in
SCE
YES SET xPS Open xPS launches xPC
YES RESET xPS Close xPS doesn’t launch xPC
NO SET xPS Open xPS launches xPC
NO RESET xPS Close xPS launches xPC
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
• The state of xPS is SET only after the time delay is obeyed when delay values of
Debouncing, filtering, toggling and toggling end of the C264 is set to its maximum,
minimum and an intermediate value possible within the specified range
The filtering delay is configured in the C264 attributes in SCE.
• The xPC Control launched by bay xPS changes control originator field orCat to Bay
Level and orIdent to xPS label
NOTE 1: Usage of order labels in profile for SPC in SCE, "order on" and "order
off" should be "Yes".
NOTE 2: “Control Sequence Activating” attribute for SPC and DPC = "Yes".
Control Sequence launched by xPS priority management
An optional « synoptic Local/Remote (L/R) » is defined to manage control sequences priority.
The priority between the actual « Bay L/R » and the « Synoptic L/R » is configurable on a per
bay basis.
L/R bay Priority 1 Local Remote
L/R synoptic Priority 2 n/a Local
Control authorized -> LCD xPS
Control is authorised by computer LCD and not by SPS when Bay L/R is priority 1 and
operates in local mode; and Synoptic L/R is priority 2 with operating mode not taken into
account by C264.
Control is authorised by xPS and not by computer LCD when Bay L/R is priority 1 and
operates in Remote mode; and Synoptic L/R is priority 2 and operating in Local Mode.
L/R bay Priority 2 n/a Local
L/R synoptic Priority 1 Local Remote
Control authorized -> xPS LCD
Control is authorised by xPS and not by computer LCD when Bay L/R is priority 2 with
operating mode not taken into account by C264 and Synoptic L/R is priority 1and operating
in Local Mode.
Control is authorised by computer LCD and not by xPS when Bay L/R is priority 2 and
operates in local mode; and Synoptic L/R is priority 1 operating in Remote Mode.
The configuration of the Synoptic L/R priority in SCE:
(1) The computed double signal is equal to the physical status if the phase not together
status is equal to “false” else the computed signal is equal to “jammed”.
(2) The computed “phases not together” is equal to “false” if all phases are in the same
position else it is equal to “true”.
(3) The computed signal is equal to the phase A status if the phase not together status is
equal to “false” else the computed signal is equal to “jammed”.
(4) Only the “DPC close “ is known by the other IEC-61850 equipment:
• For open the device they send the “DPC close” with “open” request
• For close the device they send the “DPC close” with “close” request
6.2.2 Control sequence of non-synchronised circuit breakers
Circuit breakers devices are managed in ”Direct Execute” mode and in “SBO once” mode.
Refer to the generic description above.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
(1) The computed double signal is equal to the physical status if the phase not together
status is equal to “false” else the computed signal is equal to “jammed”.
(2) The computed “phases not together” is equal to “false” if all phases are in the same
position else it is equal to “true”.
(3) The computed signal is equal to the phase A status if the phase not together status is
equal to “false” else the computed signal is equal to “jammed”.
(4) Wired SPC and SPS for external synchrocheck and system SPC and SPS for internal
synchrocheck. If is not configured the external synchrocheck module or the
synchrocheck automatism is considered always “set on”. DPC and DPS are used only
for manual synchrocheck.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
DPC open/Close
device
select close
force close
C0328ENa
In event of fail of one of these operations, the controls sequence is stopped with a negative
acknowledgement
Execution phase:
1. Close the device using synchrocheck output control
2. Verify the device position become close in the given delay
3. Set off synchrocheck module if it previously set on
4. Deselect the device if it previously selected
The chronogram that follows shows a successful control sequence ”close with
synchrocheck”.
SPC select
SPS select
DPC open/close
device
DPS open
close
The chronogram that follows shows an abnormal termination of control sequence ”close with
synchrocheck”. The device has not taken the expected position “close” in the given delay.
The control sequence is aborted with negative acknowledgement, deselecting previously
synchrocheck and device.
SPC select
SPS select
DPC open/close
device
DPS open
close
• An SBO once sequence to close the CB by the synchrocheck module and put out of
service the synchrocheck module
Three sequences:
• A “direct execute” sequence to put out service the external synchrocheck module
The scheme that follows shows a close control request where an operator at the OI or
gateway manually manages the external synchrocheck module.
DPC open/close
device SPC Select device
C26X
CIRCUIT
(2) SPC/DPC ON/OFF BREAKER
(3) synchrocheck
(4) Synchro
Check
(1)
Module
OI SPC/DPC “SET SPC/DPC Close
or ON” synchrocheck with synchrocheck
GATE
WAY
(5)
SPC/DPC “SET
OFF”synchrocheck
(optional)
DPC open/Close
device
Direct execute The external synchrocheck module is set off automatically at the
end of the SBO sequence (if it is configured)
select close
Execute close
(x) sequences order
force close
C0331ENa
Execution phase:
5. Close the device via the “close with synchrocheck” control
6. Verify the device position become close in the given delay
7. Set off the synchrocheck module if is configured to be set off automatically
8. Deselect the device if it previously selected
Third sequence (DIRECT EXECUTE): set off the external synchrocheck module
This sequence takes place only if the setting off of the synchrocheck module is configured
“manual”
1. Open “set on/setoff” output control of the synchrocheck module
2. Verify that the synchrocheck module is set on (if on/off synchrocheck input information
is configured)
The chronogram that follows shows a successful control sequence ”close with
synchrocheck” performed in three sequences. In event of automatic “setting off” of the
synchrocheck module the chronogram remain identical. It is performed at the end of the SBO
sequence.
SPC select
device
DPC open/close
device
DPS open
close
1 DE request set on 3 selection request : 4 execution request 5 DE request set 6 End of control
synchrocheck close the device off synchrocheck
C0332ENa
NOTE: During SBO sequence after step 5 the initiator of the request may
force the closing of the device.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
SPC select
(optional)
SPS select
(optional)
Forcing on DPC
close : DPC close
is set
SPS open
close
Feedback Delay Feedback Selection Timeout Feedback for DO sync close Feedback
Delay Delay
SPC select
SPS select
DPS open
close
SPC/DPC system
ON/OFF fonction
synchorcheck
SPC/DPC close
with synchrocheck SPC Select device
C26X
CIRCUIT
(1) BREAKER
(2) Fonction
(3) Synchro
Check
OI
or SPC/ DPC system
GATE Close with
WAY synchorcheck
DPC open/Close
device
select close
(x) sequences order
Execute close
force close
C0335ENa
Selection phase:
1. Close device selection output to select the device (if is configured)
2. Verify selection device input information associated to the output (if is configured)
3. Wait for the execution close request or timeout selection
In event of fail of one of these operations, the device is deselected and the controls
sequence is aborted with a negative acknowledgement.
Execution phase:
1. Active the associated internal synchrocheck automatism for authorisation to close the
device
2. Wait authorisation to close
Event 1: Synchrocheck automatism respond OK before the time-out of the given
delay
1. Close the device
2. Deselect the device (if it was previously selected)
3. Send a positive acknowledgement
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
SPC select
SPS select
Close/open
Device control
DPS open
close
The chronogram that follows shows an abnormal termination of control sequence ”close with
internal synchrocheck”.
SPC select
SPS select
Close/open
Device contro
DPS open
close
GATE
WAY
(5)
SPC select
SPS select
DPS open
close
• Earthing switch
DISCONNECTORS SWITCHES
OUTPUTS TYPE A INPUTS ALL TYPES
DEVICE DPC control for open/close of device DPS physical position of the device
CONTROL
DEVICE SPC (optional) control of device SPS (optional) device selection
SELECTION selection position information
OUTPUTS INPUTS
TRANFORMER DPC: raise/lower TPI value
CONTROL
SPS (optional) tap change in progress
(TCIP)
TRANSFORMER SPC (optional) transformer SPS (optional) selection position
SELECTION selection information
TRANFORMER Double wound or Auto-wound
TYPE NOTE 1
Double wound (or two winding transformer) is a transformer with galvanic isolation between
primary and secondary coil. Tap Changer (with additional winding) is usually located at HV-
neutral side for economic reasons. Tapping-up (raise order) reduces primary winding and
increases LV tension.
Auto-wound (or auto-transformer or single wound) is a transformer without galvanic
isolation between primary and secondary. Secondary coil follows primary coil, (winding are
serial). Tap Changer (with tap of additional winding) is serial. Increasing tap position (raise
order) acts simultaneously on primary and secondary, it reduces transformer ratio then
voltage at LV side.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
• A “raise” control is refused if the current tap position value corresponds to the
maximum position of the tap.
• A “lower” control is refused if the current tap position value corresponds to the
minimum position of the tap.
• TCIP apparition delay: The TCIP information must appear before the time-out of this
delay.
• TCIP disappearance delay: The TCIP information must disappear before the time-out
of this delay.
TPI feature: Because the TCIP input information is not always configured, the tap control is
performed using only the Tap Position Indication (TPI) value to verify the right execution of
the request. The TPI value must change in the given delay.
The following examples are given in “SBO many” mode that is the more complex. The main
difference with the “SBO once” mode remains to the possibility to execute many “raise” or
“low” controls before ending the sequence. Moreover, the device is not deselected
automatically but only after an unselect order sent by the initiator of the control request.
6.5.2.1 Control of transformer with TCIP
In this mode, when the TCIP input information is configured, the selection and execution
phase are performed as follows: It is possible by configuration to prevent to have more than
one control at a time.
Selection phase:
1. Close device selection output to select the device (if configured)
2. Verify selection device input information associated to the output (if is configured)
3. Wait for the execution request (low/raise) or timeout selection
In event of fail of one of these operations, the device is deselected, the controls
sequence is aborted with a negative acknowledgement.
Execution phase:
4. In agreement with the request “raise or lower” and the type of device, execute the
associate control
5. Wait for the TCIP data and TIP value to confirm execution. Two events:
• Event 1: The TCIP information appears and is disappears in the given
delays, the TPI takes the expected value: The computer sends a positive
acknowledgement and waits a new request (execution or unselection).
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
SPC select
(optional)
SPS select
(optional)
DPC raise/lower
OPEN
TPI Value
(1)
raise/lower
CLOSE
SPS TCIP
FeedbackSelection TCIP
Pulse
Delay timeOut disappearance FeedBack
Delay
time Delay Delay
0-5 s 4
11 End of control
1 2 3 0-5 s
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 selection “raise” request
3 first execution 6 second execution 10 unselect request
request request
C0340ENa
NOTE (1): The TPI value must take the expected value at least at the end of
TCIP disappearance
The chronogram that follows shows an abnormal termination of tap changer control
sequence due to absence TCIP confirmation. In this event the device is automatically
deselected and the sequence ends with a negative acknowledgement
SPC select
(optional)
SPS select
(optional)
OPEN
raise/lower
CLOSE
SPS TCIP
TIP value
4
0-5 s
0-1 s 0-10mn 0-1 s
TCIP apparition time
1 2 Delay 5 6
1 selection request “raise” 6 End of control
3 0-5 s
3 execution request C0340ENa
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
• Event 2: Timeout awaiting the TPI value or unexpected TPI value: The device
is deselected (if it was previously selected), and the sequence is aborted with
a negative acknowledgement.
6. Wait for the new execution request or unselection request to deselect the device
• In event of new request the computer repeat the steps 4 and 5.
• In event of unselection request the computer deselects the device (if it was
previously selected), and ends the sequence with a positive
acknowledgement.
The chronogram that follows shows a successful sequence with device selection, a raise
control and device unselection
SPC select
(optional)
SPS select
(optional)
DPC raise/lower
OPEN
raise/lower
CLOSE
TPI
feedback
Feedback Selection Delay
Pulse
Delay time-out
Delay
4
0-5 s
0-1 s 0-10mn 0-1 s
new TPI value
1 2 Delay 6
1 selection “raise” request 7 End of control
6 Unselect request
3 0-5 s 5
3 execution request
C0342ENa
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
The chronogram that follows shows an abnormal termination due to the absence of change
of the TPI value in the given delay. The device is automatically deselected, and the
sequence is aborted with negative acknowledgement.
SPC select
(optional)
SPS select
(optional)
DPC raise/lower
OPEN
raise/lower
CLOSE
TPI
4
0-5 s
0-1 s 0-10mn 0-1 s
new SPI value
1 2 Delay 6
1 selection request “raise”
6 End of control
3 0-5 s 5
3 execution request
C0343ENa
• IED connected,
• SBMC mode,
• Lock condition,
• Inside a bay
If a device is under control and another control is sent on this device, the second one is
ignored.
In event of uniqueness of the command at least to one of these levels the selection is
refused, with negative acknowledgement. The user may bypass this control during selection
request.
6.12.9 Interlocking
The operation of a switching device, such as circuit breakers; traditional disconnecting
switches; disconnecting switches with abrupt rupture; and ground disconnecting switches; is
directly related to the nature of the switch and to its environment.
To operate these devices you must respect some conditions. These conditions, called
interlocking, are managed by logical equations within the C264.
Interlocking prohibits a control sequence that may violate the device operating condition: for
example, break capability, isolation, and so on; or plant operating condition.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
6.13.2 Disconnector
The control sequence of disconnectors is identical to single non-synchronised circuit
breakers.
6.13.3 Transformer
Transformer position is determined using TPI (Tap Position Indication). TPI can be a Digital
Measurement or Analogue Measurement (from DC Analogue Input).
The transformer is the only device that supports the SBO Many control sequences. It is
linked to voltage regulation, also its Raise and Lower controls are defined for secondary
voltage (and not tap position). Except for auto wounded transformer, raise/lower voltage is
also a raise/lower tap.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
7. AUTOMATIONS
C264 provides three different ways to perform automation functions:
• Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) (True for all C264 except for the C264
Standalone)
• xPS/xPC Association
• Pole Discrepancy
7.1.1 Auto-Recloser (AR)
7.1.1.1 Introduction
80-90% of faults on the electrical network are transient, such as lightning or insulator
flashover. When a fault occurs, the Circuit Breaker is tripped in order to protect the system.
The Auto-Recloser function is then used to close the circuit breaker after a set time, a time
that is long enough to allow the fault to clear. This duration is called cycle delay and is
defined in the database during the configuration phase.
But, as permanent fault can occur, an auto-recloser scheme has to be provided in order to
allow the elimination of a transient fault by an open/close sequence (auto-reclosing cycle)
and the elimination of permanent fault by, after a defined number of auto-reclosing cycle (4
cycles maximum), leaving the circuit breaker in the open state by closing the trip relay.
A transient fault, such as a lightning strike, is one that is cleared by immediate tripping of one
or more CB’s to isolate the fault, and does not recur when the line is re-energised.
This means that in the majority of fault incidents, if the faulty line is immediately tripped out,
and if time is allowed for the arc to de-ionise, reclosure of the CB will result in the line being
successfully re-energised. (A Closed/Open/Closed cycle)
However, some faults will be permanent (such as a line fallen to earth). In this event the
auto-recloser must be able to react to the permanent fault, and on the first reclose and
detection of the permanent fault open the CB’s (and, if required lock out the auto-reclose
functionality). (This is a Closed/Open/Closed/Open, 4 cycle system).
Auto-recloser (AR) schemes are implemented to carry out this duty automatically.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
7.1.1.2 Behaviour
The general diagram of the auto-recloser function follows:
Auto-recloser out
of service
In Service request
Auto-recloser in
service
TRIP /TRIP_1P_X
3 phases
no 1 phase
CB_HEALTHY Analysis of the CB_HEALTHY no
Cycle n˚=1
= SET ? received trip = SET ?
yes yes
Waiting CB Waiting CB
opening opening
TRIP
TRIP_1P_X always set
End of
End of TRIP always set
timer
timer AR locked
AR locked
AR_BLOCKING no
AR_BLOCKING
no = RESET ?
= RESET ?
yes
yes
Closing the CB
Closing the CB
Launch
recovering timer
End of TRIP
timer
Cycle n˚=2
TRIP End of
timer
no
Last cycle?
yes
AR locked
C0137ENa
• The TRIP_1P_X or TRIP signal sent by the protection relay (single-phase trip / 3-
phases trip)
− In a single phase cycle, only one phase position is awaited in the OPEN state
(CB_STATE_1P_X)
− In a 3-phases cycle, each one phase positions is awaited in the OPEN state
• Whatever was the cycle, the 3 phase position is awaited in the OPEN state
(CB_STATE)
For a 3-phase cycle, the DO “AR_TRIP_3P” is closed (if configured) as soon as the CB is
detected as open.
The auto-recloser function is locked if the CB is not opened at the end of the timer.
7.1.1.2.4 Launch cycle timer
As soon as the CB is detected as open, the timer associated to the current auto-recloser
phase is launched.
During the single-phase cycle, the trip signal must disappear: if not, the auto-recloser
function will be locked. Furthermore, a 3-phases trip could appear. In this event, the current
cycle is stopped and the second 3-phases slow cycle is launched.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
• A trip during the last auto-recloser cycle (in this event, the AR_STATE signal is set at
the AR_BAR_SHOTS state)
• A lock signal through the AR_LOCK Binary Input at the SET state
• There is no pole discordance at the end of the single-phase cycle: that is, the three
phases are opened
• 2 phases are in an opened state at the end of the single-phase cycle without 3-phases
trip signal
• Trip Circuit Supervision with two Digital Inputs without external resistor: FIGURE 56:
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION WITH TWO DI.
For the Trip Circuit Supervision with one Digital Input + external resistor, please refer to
FIGURE 55: TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION WITH ONE DI.
The resistor (R) in the trip circuit supervision scheme should have a value in agreement with
2 limits:
1. High enough so that once the CB is open, the tripping coil powered via the resistor
has no magnetic effect anymore so that the tripping mecanism is released (within a
possible delay due to inductive effect of the coil).
2. Low enough so that the C264 input powered via the resistor (and the tripping coil) is
detected active.
Therefore:
3. It is assumed that 10% of nominal voltage applied on the tripping coil makes its
magnetic effect low enough to release the tripping mechanism after activation. Taking
into account normal tolerance on power supply, this leads to a minimum value of R
being approximately 10 to 12 times the resistance of the tripping coil.
4. The input was tested to operate with a series resistor up to 40kOhm, still leaving
voltage across the input above the minimum. Taking into account tolerances, this
defines a maximum value for the resistor of 20kOhm.
We recommend the value in the middle of the range (geometrically). If Rc is the resistance of
the tripping coil, then:
R / 12xRc = 20kOhm / R
The power rating of the resistor must be such that it withstands permanent application of
maximum trip circuit voltage. Therefore:
P = (1.2 x Uaux)2 / R
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
• The number of CB operations for the 3 poles (i.e. the highest of the pole values)
The C264 cumulates from the latest reset:
7.1.3.2 Reset
All the stored values can be simultaneously reset. This control can be available at all controls
points.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
7.1.3.3 Monitoring
The C264 can monitor each cumulated value with two thresholds settable independently and
display an overrun event on the local mimic or activate a LED.
The information can feed in any local or distributed automation scheme.
7.1.3.4 Inhibition
The function can be disabled through a setting.
To prevent the sums from accruing, for example during a test, use:
• The Micom S1
7.1.3.5 Storage
The values are stored in a non-volatile memory to save them in event of auxiliary power
outage.
A dedicated procedure allows you to set the stored values with the CAT on a per
measurement basis.
The switch of any new configuration database does not reset any of the stored values, but a
software download does.
In event of a C264 redundancy, the stored values in the standby computer are exchanged
from Main to Standby after each calculation.
• Circuit breakers
• Digital inputs from the systems digital input boards, from other system computers,
from protection relays and other IED’s via communication network (single and double
point, digital groups),
• Internal indications: for example, system failures, equipment operation modes and so
on.
• Limits derived from measured values from the systems analog input boards (CT, VT,
transducers), from other system computers, from protection relays and other IED’s via
communication network.
7.2.2 Interlocking:Outputs
Result of the interlocking equation is transmitted through a system binary output and saved,
locally in RAM, by the function managing interlocking logical equations.
And, a service is available for any task to get the result of the computation.
Thus , the function managing “control of sequence” uses this service to know whether control
can be executed.
Then, a simple transient binary input can be set if defined in configuration. The same SPS is
used for the commands “open” and “close” of a xPC
7.2.4.1 Principle
In computer, a logical interlocking equation is defined as a sum of product (AB+CDE+F for
example).
7.2.4.1.1 Introduction
Interlocking function uses as many as two interlocking equations per switching device on
bay-level and on substation-level. During configuration process the definition of the switching
devices can be:
• Without associated interlocking equations,
• With only one interlocking equation: for example, for opening, closing being not
checked or vice-versa,
• With two interlocking equations (for opening and closing). The interlocking equations
can be different but can also be identical.
The equation is composed of Boolean information mainly representing the position of other
switching devices.
The interlocking for a switching device may be composed of substation interlocking
equations and local interlocking equations.
Both interlocking are managed by the computer that controls the switching device.
The local equation is made up of information obtained from its own digital inputs and IEDs
connected to this computer.
Substation interlocking is made up information obtained from its digital inputs and inputs
provided by the communication network from other computers, from bay computers and from
IED’s (protection relays, etc.). Substation interlocking can also be managed by the
topological interlocking function. Refer to Topological interlocking for more details.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
NOT
True False
False True
Invalid Invalid
• (C is in the lower state) AND (D is in the higher state) AND (E is in the lower state)
The terms of these equations can be issued from:
• Single point status (BI)
• 1 among N BI (SIG)
• Measurement (MEAS)
At configuration time, operator has to define the “interlocking profile” of each data included in
an interlocking equation. It means that operator must select for each state or validity of a
data a logical state: TRUE, FALSE or INVALID.
Interlocking computation
An interlocking equation:
• Is computed each time that one of its element changes of quality or state and
• Get logical state related to the received state and validity of the data
− Send the new state of the system binary input (BI) that represents the result of the
interlock. BI can be: SET, RESET or INVALID
Interlocking consultation
On reception of open or close request, if the logical equation related to with the switching
device exists, the “control of sequence” function used the service offered by the interlocking
function to get the result of the interlocking associated to the received request.
If result of the interlocking is TRUE, the check is considered as achieved, else request must
be refused and a negative acknowledgement sent to the origin of the request.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
• Circuit breakers
• Digital inputs from the systems digital input boards, from other system computers,
from protection relays and other IED’s via communication network (single and double
point, digital groups),
• Internal indications: for example, system failures, equipment operation modes and so
on.
• Limits derived from measured values from the systems analog input boards (CT, VT,
transducers), from other system computers, from protection relays and other IED’s via
communication network.
7.3.2 Interlocking:Outputs
Result of the interlocking equation is transmitted through a system binary output and saved,
locally in RAM, by the function managing interlocking logical equations.
And, a service is available for any task to get the result of the computation.
Thus , the function managing “control of sequence” uses this service to know whether control
can be executed.
Then, a simple transient binary input can be set if defined in configuration. The same SPS is
used for the commands “open” and “close” of a xPC
7.3.4.1 Principle
In computer, a logical interlocking equation is defined as a sum of product (AB+CDE+F for
example).
7.3.4.1.1 Introduction
Interlocking function uses as many as two interlocking equations per switching device on
bay-level and on substation-level. During configuration process the definition of the switching
devices can be:
• Without associated interlocking equations,
• With only one interlocking equation: for example, for opening, closing being not
checked or vice-versa,
• With two interlocking equations (for opening and closing). The interlocking equations
can be different but can also be identical.
The equation is composed of Boolean information mainly representing the position of other
switching devices.
The interlocking for a switching device may be composed of substation interlocking
equations and local interlocking equations.
Both interlocking are managed by the computer that controls the switching device.
The local equation is made up of information obtained from its own digital inputs and IEDs
connected to this computer.
Substation interlocking is made up information obtained from its digital inputs and inputs
provided by the communication network from other computers, from bay computers and from
IED’s (protection relays, etc.). Substation interlocking can also be managed by the
topological interlocking function. Refer to Topological interlocking for more details.
7.3.4.1.2 Local interlocking
The local interlocking is done by calculation of a logical equation. You can have as many as
one equation for each switching device and for each direction (open and close). If there is no
equation for a switching device for a direction, the related variable is true.
7.3.4.1.3 Substation interlocking
The substation interlocking analyses the position of all switching devices in the substation
and calculates the substation interlocking equation to authorise control of a switching device
according to the mechanical and electrical capabilities of the switching device. If there is no
equation for a switching device for a direction, the corresponding variable is true.
7.3.4.1.4 Interlocking: Validity of data
The interlocking equation does not only use the value of the information but also the validity
of the information (invalid, ...).
Thus the result, saved in RAM, of a logical equation is only TRUE or FALSE, An Interlocking
equation in the INVALID state will be considered as FALSE .
But, the system binary input also generated can be valid (SET or RESET) or invalid.
The evaluation of the result of basic logical function such as NOT, AND or OR is defined as
follows:
NOT
True False
False True
Invalid Invalid
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
• (C is in the lower state) AND (D is in the higher state) AND (E is in the lower state)
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
• 1 among N BI (SIG)
• Measurement (MEAS)
At configuration time, operator has to define the “interlocking profile” of each data included in
an interlocking equation. It means that operator must select for each state or validity of a
data a logical state: TRUE, FALSE or INVALID.
Interlocking computation
An interlocking equation:
• Is computed each time that one of its element changes of quality or state and
• Get logical state related to the received state and validity of the data
− Send the new state of the system binary input (BI) that represents the result of the
interlock. BI can be: SET, RESET or INVALID
Interlocking consultation
On reception of open or close request, if the logical equation related to with the switching
device exists, the “control of sequence” function used the service offered by the interlocking
function to get the result of the interlocking associated to the received request.
If result of the interlocking is TRUE, the check is considered as achieved, else request must
be refused and a negative acknowledgement sent to the origin of the request.
Simulation and test of interlocking equations
The interlocking system is checked during the in house test of the substation control system.
Each interlocking equation may be checked by issuing a control to the corresponding
switching device.
For checking the interlocking on site a “SIMULATION mode“ is implemented in the computer.
In this operating mode, a valid control is sent to the output, but closing the contact is not
performed and a positive acknowledgement message is generated.
• Generate code
• Simulate
• Debug
• Project management.
The software logic package supports standard programming languages of the IEC 1131-3:
• Sequential Function Chart, SFC (GRAFCET)
For action and transition description, you can use this language with Function Block Diagram
(FBD), Ladder Diagram (LD) or Instruction List (IL).
• Structured Text, ST
The logic development workbench generates code. The code is uploaded to the computer
target system that operates the code.
Control logic
application
code
7.4.1 Inputs
All the datapoints of the C264 can be used as an input of a PLC.
• MEAS
• CT
• CO
NOTE: A CO can be used as input of a PLC function, but only through the
use of ‘C’ function present by default with the kernel.
7.4.2 Outputs
A PLC function can:
• Generate a BI, for example. PLC is considered as source of acquisition of the data
point
• Generate an MEAS
• Generate a CT
• Generate an SPI
• Generate an SIG
7.4.3 Control
Automations can be triggered:
• By operator request,
7.4.4 Behaviour
The computer has a software execution engine that interprets the automation application
code as shown in the cycle that follows:
Read inputs
Execute programs
Write outputs
C0345ENa
The cycle duration depends on the number of I/O to be scanned and the complexity of the
operations to be performed. Set the cycle during the configuration process.
• The two different time cycles of a PLC-program can be set from 10 ms up to several
seconds. For some specific equations a cycle less or equal to 10ms and a cycle less
or equal to 100ms for the other logic equations. The time cycle for the automatic
functions shall be less than 100ms.
• Routing of the automatism applications to the memory must be in agreement with the
memory and hardware design.
• To debug the applications, you can connect a PC to the front face. The hardware
design separates the debug function and the application download function.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
I1
& DO1
setting
I2
& DO2
setting
≥1 t
&
BI1
≥1
setting
≥1
I3
≥1
I4
C0140ENa
8. USER INTERFACE
Please refer to the chapter Human Interface (HI).
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
9. RECORDS
Several kinds of records are stored in the C264.
The disturbance recorder can be triggered by the following events, each of which is user
configurable:
• Changes in state of binary inputs (SP, DP, MP, SI or Groups)
• Operator request
Only one re-trig is allowed: it means that a new trigger can only be accepted after the end of
recording of the current waveform.
Disturbance records are available in COMTRADE 2001 format.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
• If the integration period is less or equal to 1 second, the recorded value is the
current measurement value
N
TMi
Record = ∑
i =1 N
Record: recorded value
9.1.6 Events
All data change or events declared in MiCOM C264 configuration database “To be logged”
are stored in a circular queue.
The event records are available for viewing either via the front panel LCD, via slave protocol
at SCADA level or on CAT equipment. They also can be printed.
Events, following MiCOM C264 configuration, may typically contain the MiCOM C264
description, the date of the event and the time of the event with an accuracy of 1 ms, plus
specific information regarding the causes of the events.
The MiCOM C264 under the following circumstances may create events:
• Changes of state of Binary Inputs (SP, DP, MP, SI, Groups)
• Alarm acknowledgement.
The size queue is:
a “differed” alarm is displayed only after a user-selectable time delay following its detection
(the event associated with the alarm must remain present during the delay; if not, the alarm
will be not displayed) ; this delay is in the range of 1 to 120 seconds and can be set to
particular value for each “differed” alarm.
Gravity level: this level is defined for each alarm allowing a hierarchical classification to deal
with the urgency of the events; the gravity level value can be: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, 5 being the
most grave and 0 meaning that there is no gravity level.
Alarm generated:
only when the associated event appears
OR
when the associated event appears AND when it disappears
In this event the “differed” parameter is taken into account only when event appears; when
event disappears the new state of the alarm is displayed immediately.
Alarm clearing mode:
manual: the alarm is cleared only on an operator request; this clearing command is only
allowed on inactive-acknowledged alarms.
automatic: an alarm is automatically cleared when it reaches the appropriate state.
gravity basis
Audible or not when detected.
Alarm processing
Only one alarm (the last one) associated with a state change of a data is displayed. The
previous one (concerning the data) is replaced by the current one.
According to the previous example, only one from the three alarmed states can be displayed
for the switching device: for example, « JAMMED » or « TOGGLING » or « OPEN » state
(the last one that has appeared).
By configuration, one of the following behaviours is chosen:
Alarm inactive
/ cleared
0
AL+
AL+
Alarm active-
AL- (auto) unacknowledged AL+
ACK (auto)
Alarm inactive-
acknowledged
CLEAR AL+
4
C0143ENa
Alarm inactive
/ cleared
0
AL+ AL+
AL+
Alarm active-
unacknowledged
AL+
1
AL+
AL-
ACK
ACK (auto)
Alarm inactive-
CLEAR acknowledged AL+
4
C0144ENa
Transition events:
AL+: alarmed event appearance
AL-: alarmed event disappearance
ACK: operator acknowledgement of the alarm
CLEAR: operator clearing of the alarm
NOTE:In that event «alarmed event disappears (AL-)» means that the associated data is now in another s
Transition conditions:
(auto) means Automatic clearing
Transition description:
The transition from alarm state "0" to alarm state "1" is crossed when the alarmed event
appears (AL+).
The alarm state transitions "1 → 1" and "2 → 1" are crossed when the state of the data
associated with the alarm goes from a state that is flagged to be alarmed with any gravity
level to another state that is also flagged to be alarmed with any gravity level (AL+). In this
event the active alarm stays active but the time tagging of the alarm is changed. The new
alarm time stamp corresponds to the last associated data state change. The alarm becomes
unacknowledged if not already unacknowledged.
The alarm state transitions "1 → 2", "3 → 4" and “5 → 3” are crossed on operator
acknowledge action. The time stamp of the alarm is unchanged.
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
The alarm state transitions "1 → 3" and “1 → 5” are crossed when the alarmed event
disappears (AL-). The time stamp of the alarm is modified.
The alarm state transition "2 → 4" is crossed when the event disappears (AL-) the alarm
being configured to be activated only "on appearance of the event". The time stamp of the
alarm is modified.
The alarm state transition "2 → 3" is crossed when the event disappears (AL-) the alarm
being configured to be activated "on appearance and disappearance of the event". The time
stamp of the alarm is modified and the alarm will have to be acknowledged again.
The alarm state transitions "3 → 1", "4 → 1" and “5 → 1” are crossed when the previous
alarmed event appears again or when another state that is also flagged to be alarmed with
any gravity level appears (AL+). The alarm becomes active-unacknowledged. The time
stamp of the alarm is modified.
The alarm state transition "2 → 0" is crossed when the event disappears (AL-) the alarm
being configured to be activated only "on appearance of the event" and «to be cleared
automatically». The alarm is suppressed from the alarm list.
The alarm state transition "3 → 0" is crossed on operator acknowledgement only if the alarm
associated with the event is configured as «to be cleared automatically». The alarm is
suppressed from the alarm list.
The alarm state transition "4 → 0" is crossed on operator clearing action. The alarm is
suppressed from the alarm list.
Acknowledgement
Acknowledgement of an alarm can be done by two ways:
On operator request: an operator can acknowledge an existing alarm from the front panel
to signify that it has been taken into account.
Globally: at substation level it is possible to use a SPS (named Global alarm ack) specially
dedicated to a global acknowledgement of alarms: When this SPS is set to the SET state all
alarms present in the computer are acknowledged. As long as this SPS remains in the SET
state, any new alarm is inserted in the alarm list with the ACKLOWLEDGED status.
In addition to the Global Alarm Acknowledgement SPS, a Local Alarm Acknowledgement
SPS can be defined on a per C264 basis: that is, one for each C264.
This SPS can be wired or managed by an automation. When this SPS is configured in a
C264, the “Global Alarm Acknowledgement” SPS is no more taken into account by this
C264.
When this SPS is SET, all C264 alarms are immediately acknowledged.
This SPS cannot be transmitted on the Station Bus network: that is, it remains local to the
C264, so it cannot be associated to a remote – OI or SCADA - control.
Clearing
Whatever the clearing mode is, the clearing of an alarm is immediately taken into account:
suppression from the alarm list.
Automatic clearing
An alarm can be configured as “to be cleared automatically”. It means that when this alarm
reaches the appropriate state, it is cleared automatically without any operator action. The
events of “automatic clearing” are:
the alarm is in the active-acknowledged state and the alarm disappears (for event alarmed
on appearance only)
the alarm is in the inactive-active-unacknowledged state and the operator acknowledges it
(for event alarmed on appearance only)
the alarm is in the inactive-unacknowledged state and the operator acknowledges it (for
event alarmed on appearance and disappearance)
This feature can be configured on a per alarm basis.
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
• Synchronous Polarisation
Minimum phase voltage fixed threshold enabling synchronous polarising: 0.6V
Synchronous polarising permanence time phase voltage thresholds: 5 s
• Hysteresis 95%
• Reset time
• Hysteresis 95%
• Reset time
• Sensitive Earth current Range 0.002 to 1 x rated current, step of 0.001 Ien
• Hysteresis 95%
• Reset time
• Hysteresis 105%
10.6 Earth Wattmetric Protection (ANSI code32N)
• Hysteresis 95%
• Reset time
⎛ K ⎞
t = T×⎜ + L⎟
⎜ (I I ) − 1 ⎟
α
⎝ S ⎠
Where:
t = Tripping time
K = Coefficient (see table)
I = Value of measured current
IS = Value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value)
α = Coefficient (see table)
L = ANSI/IEEE coefficient (zero for IEC curves)
T = Time multiplier between 0.025 and 1.5
⎛ 1 ⎞
t = K × ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ 0.339 − 0.236 /(I / Is) ⎠
DMT + RECT 0 ms
Reset timer:
The first phase and earth overcurrent stages are provided with a timer hold facility "t Reset",
which may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse time characteristic (IEEE/ANSI
curves only). This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with
upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays.
Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance
times is where intermittent faults occur. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated
cable . In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable
insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault
current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until
the fault becomes permanent.
When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is minimum the relay will be repeatedly reset
and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility the
relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.
The reset timer "t Reset" facility can be found in the following menu:
• If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEC or RI curve, the reset
timer "t Reset" with DMT characteristic is settable in the menu:
− If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEEE or CO curve, the
reset timer "t Reset" with IDMT characteristic is not settable.
Reset Time "t Reset" with an IDMT characteristic:
The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is:
⎛ K ⎞
t = T × ⎜⎜ ⎟
⎝ 1 − (I Is ) ⎠
α ⎟
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
Where:
t = Reset time
K = Coefficient (see table)
I = Value of the measured current
IS = Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)
1
TIME I N SE CONDS
0,1
0,01
0,001
1 10 100
MULTIPLES OF PI CK UP SETTI NG
10
A
B
C
TIME I N SE CONDS
0,1
D
0,01 E
0,001
1 10 100
MULTIPLES OF PI CK UP SETTI NG
E TMS=0.025
: DTMS=0.2
: C TMS=0.5
: B TMS=1
: A TMS=1.25
:
P0007ENc
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
100
10
A
B
TIME IN SECONDS
C
1
0,1
0,01
1 10 100
P0008ENa
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
10
TIME IN SECONDS
1 A
B
0,01
0,001
1 10 100
P0009ENa
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
10000
1000
100
TIME IN SECONDS
10
A
B
0,1 C
0,01
0,001
1 10 100
P00010ENa
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
10000
1000
100
TIME I N SE CONDS
A
B
D
1
E
0,1
1 10 100
MULTIPLES OF PI CK UP SETTI NG
P0011ENc
Functional Description C264P/EN FT/C80
11.1.3 RI Curves
RI CURVES
100
10
TIME IN SECONDS
0,1
1 10 100
P0012ENa
C264P/EN FT/C80 Functional Description
10
1
TIME IN SECONDS
0,1
0,01
0,001
0,0001
0,01 0,1 1 10 100
10
1
TIME IN SECONDS
0,1
A
A B
B C
C
D
0,01
D
E
0,001 E
0,0001
0,01 0,1 1 10 100
B : TMS/RTMS=1 A : TMS/RTMS=1.25
1000
100
10
TIME IN SECONDS
A
1
A B
B C
C
D
D
0,1
E
E
0,01
0,01 0,1 1 10 100
100
10
A
B
C
D
1
TIME IN SECONDS
A
E B
0,1 C
0,01
0,001
0,01 0,1 1 10 100
1000
100
B
C
TIME IN SECONDS
10
1
A
E B
0,1
D
E
0,01
0,01 0,1 1 10 100
1000
100
A
B
10 C
D
TIME IN SECONDS
A
B
0,1 C
0,01
0,001
0,01 0,1 1 10 100
⎛ K ² − θ² ⎞
Ttrip = Te In⎜ ⎟
⎜ K ² − θtrip² ⎟
⎝ ⎠
With:
Ttrip = Time to trip (in seconds)
Te = Thermal time constant of the protected element (in seconds)
Iθ> = Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the supplier
k = Factor associated to the thermal state formula
θ2 = Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then θ2 = 0.3
θtrip2 = Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then θ trip2 = 1
The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula:
1000
100
TIME IN SECONDS
A
10
B
C
D
E
1
0,1
1 10
BLANK PAGE
Hardware C264P/EN HW/C80
MiCOM C264P
HARDWARE
Hardware C264P/EN HW/C80
CONTENT
2. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 4
2.1 Components 4
2.1.1 Hardware Overview 5
2.2 Rack styles 6
2.2.1 MICOM C264P 6
2.2.2 MiCOM C264 10
2.3 Coding of board address 13
2.4 Modules description 14
2.4.1 Power auxiliary supply and legacy ports board – BIU241 14
2.4.2 Dual source power supply board – BIU261 16
2.4.3 Central Processing Unit and base communications board – CPU260 19
2.4.4 Central Processing Unit and base communications board – CPU270 20
2.4.5 DSPIO board 21
2.4.6 Circuit breaker Control Unit - CCU200 22
2.4.7 Circuit breaker Control Unit - CCU211 23
2.4.8 Digital Inputs Unit – DIU200 25
2.4.9 Digital Inputs Unit – DIU211 26
2.4.10 Digital Outputs Unit – DOU201 28
2.4.11 Analogue Input Unit – AIU201 29
2.4.12 Analogue Input Unit – AIU211 30
2.4.13 Transducerless Measurements Unit – TMU210 31
2.4.14 Analogue Output Unit – AOU200 32
2.4.15 Ethernet Switch Unit – SWU200/SWU202 33
2.4.16 Ethernet Redundant Switch Unit – SWR202/SWR212, SWR204/SWR214 35
2.4.17 Dual Homing Ethernet Switch Unit – SWD202/SWD212, SWD204/SWD214 39
2.4.18 Extended communication Unit – ECU200 44
2.4.19 Extended communication Unit – ECU210 44
C264/EN HW/C80 Hardware
BLANK PAGE
Hardware C264P/EN HW/C80
2. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
2.1 Components
The MiCOM C264P is based on a modular and scalable architecture to support dedicated
hardware modules adapted to the plant data interfaces.
Each MiCOM C264P rack can be equipped with the following modules:
• BIU241: Basic Interface Unit. This board includes the auxiliary power supply
converter, the watchdog relay, 2 digital outputs/2 digital inputs for C264 redundancy
and 2 isolated RS485/RS232 interfaces
• BIU 261: Basic Interface Unit. This board includes the dual source power supply for
C264 power supply redundancy, the watchdog relay, 2 digital outputs/2 digital inputs
for C264 redundancy and 1 isolated RS232/RS422RS485 interfaces
• CPU260 (also named CPU2) or CPU270 (also named CPU3): Central Processing
Unit and communications board based on PowerPC processor
• CCU200: Circuit breaker Control Unit each with 8 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs
• CCU211: Circuit breaker Control Unit each with 8 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs
(versions are jumper-selected)
• DIU211: Digital Inputs Unit each with 16 digital inputs for voltages from 24 to 220Vdc
(versions are jumper-selected)
• AIU201: Analogue Input Unit each with 4 analogue inputs direct current or voltage
• AIU211: Analogue Input Unit each with 8 analogue inputs direct current
• SWU20x: Ethernet SWitch Unit board with 4 electrical links and x= 0 or x=2 optical
links
• SWR2xx: Ethernet SWitch board for Redundant Ethernet ring with 4 electrical links
and 2 optical links for the Dual ring.
• SWD2xx: Ethernet SWitch board for Dual Homing Ethernet star, with 4 electrical links
and 2 optical links for a Dual star.
• ECU200: Extended Communication Unit board to convert non isolated RS232 into
optical signal
• ECU201: Extended Communication Unit board to convert non isolated RS232 into
isolated RS485 signal
• GHU201 (for C264) or GHU200 (for C264P): Graphical Human machine interface
Unit: Front Panel including 17 LEDs (13 are user-configurable) + 7 pushbuttons (L/R,
Open, Close, etc) + LCD (resolution of 128 x 128 pixels /16 lines of 21 characters
each) and a keypad at the front plate for local HMI management
• GHU211 (for C264) or GHU210 (for C264P): Front Panel including 17 LEDs (12 are
user-configurable) + 1 pushbutton (L/R)
• GHU221 (for C264) or GHU220 (for C264P): Front Face used to connect a
detachable HMI (GHU20x or GHU21x)
Hardware C264P/EN HW/C80
Watchdog
FBP28x BIU 241/261
or FBP24x (1) Redundancy RS 232 /RS 485 /RS 422
Ethernet
CPU 260/270 Optical link (CPU260) or Electrical link (CPU270)
(1)
COM 1 / COM 2
RS 232 ECU20x RS 485
DSP200 for RS 422
CPU260 IRIG -B RS 232 ECU20x Optical
GHU200/201
OR
GHU210/211
OR
GHU220/221 GHU20X/21X
Electrical 1 to 4
AIU2x1
(up to 6) 4 digital inputs (AIU201)
8 digital inputs (AIU211)
DOU201
(up to 15) 10 digital outputs
CCU 200/211
(up to 15) 8 digital intputs
4 digital outputs
DIU200
(up to 15) 16 digital inputs
AOU 200
4 analogue outputs
(up to 4)
• Metallic case
Hardware C264P/EN HW/C80
• a keypad at the front plate for local HMI management with 5 pushbuttons
2.2.1.2.2 GHU210
The GHU210 is the front panel with LEDs used for the MiCOM C264P:
• 1 pushbutton (L/R)
2.2.1.2.3 GHU220
The GHU220 is the front panel used for the MiCOM P. This includes only an RJ11 coupler in
order to connect a remote GHU20x or GHU21x.
2.2.1.3 Sockets
The FBP242 board is the front backplane of MiCOM C264P equipped with the CPU260.
FIGURE 8: MiCOM C264P – REAR PANEL EQUIPPED WITH A CT/VT BOARD (TMU2XX)
The FBP243 board is the front backplane of the MiCOM C264P equipped with the CPU270:
• Front Panel degree of protection: IP52 (for front panel with LEds or LCD)
• Metallic case
C264 fixation holes position:
• a keypad at the front plate for local HMI management with 5 pushbuttons
• 1 pushbutton (L/R)
2.2.2.3 Sockets
The FBP28X board is the front backplane of MiCOM C264C equipped with the CPU260.
FIGURE 16: MiCOM C264 – REAR PANEL EQUIPPED WITH A CT/VT CONNECTOR
The FBP283 board is the front backplane of the MiCOM C264 equipped with the CPU270.
− Jumper
− missing => 1
− present => 0
Example:
1 0
0 2
0 0
0 8
address =1 address = 10
C0030ENa
NOTE: Two boards of the same type must not have the same address
C0033ENa
• In RS232 set the jumpers S14, S16 and between S12.1 and S12.3
• In RS485 set the jumpers S13, S15 and between S12.1 and S12.2. It is possible to
end the line with a 124Ω resistor by setting S17. (See CO chapter to know when the
resistor has to be used).
2.4.1.2 Configurable communication Port 2 - RS232/422/485
The communication link characteristics are:
• In RS485 set the jumpers S7, S8, S2. It is possible to end the line with a 124Ω
resistor by setting S11. (See CO chapter to know when the resistor has to be used).
• In RS422 set the jumpers S7, S8, S4 and S2. It is possible to end the line with a 124Ω
resistor by setting the jumpers S10 and S11. (See CO chapter to know when the
resistor has to be used).
C264/EN HW/C80 Hardware
• Supply C264 from two power supplies (main and secondary) of the same range.
S6
S7
S3 S8
S2 S9
S4
S5
RS422 set S2, S4, S7, S8 It is possible to end the line with a
120 Ω resistor by setting the jumpers
S10 and S11. (See CO chapter §2.3
to know when the resistor has to be
used).
RS485 set S2, S7, S8 It is possible to end the line with a
120 Ω resistor by setting S11. (See
CO chapter §2.3 to know when the
resistor has to be used).
Hardware C264P/EN HW/C80
• Two non isolated RS232 links. The transmission rate must be the same on both
links (values from 50 to 56000 bps configurable with the configuration tool or
settable via GHU20x)
• An IRIG-B input
• Calendar saved
• Two non isolated RS232 links. The transmission rate must be the same on both links
(values from 50 to 56000 bps configurable with the configuration tool or settable via
GHU20x)
• An IRIG-B input
• Calendar saved
• The digital inputs can be used for single or double remote signalling, pulse or digital
measurement input on the same module.
• The input responds to negative input voltages and they are not self controlled
• All voltages between 24V and 220V DC selected using jumpers (with CPU3)
J2-4
J2-3
J2- 2
J2-1
• From 24V to 220VDC: a peak current (> 27mA) circulates during a short time (± 2 ms)
to clean external contacts:
• For use with CPU 2 board, the address of the board is selected using a four-position
header and jumper.
• For use with CPU 3 board, the address of the board can be defined by the location of
the CCU211 in the C264 rack (or by jumper if the board is used as spare of a
previous board). This location is defined using the SCE.
Hardware C264P/EN HW/C80
• The digital inputs can be used for single or double status, pulse or digital
measurement input on the same module.
• The digital inputs can be used for single or double status, pulse or digital
measurement input on the same unit.
J2-4
J2-3
J2- 2
J2-1
• From 24Vdc to 220Vdc: a peak current (> 27mA) circulates during a short time
(± 2 ms) to clean external relay’s contacts:
Settings: for use with CPU 3 board, the address of the board can be defined by the location
of the DIU211 in the C264 rack (or by jumper if the board is used as spare of a previous
board). This location is defined using the SCE.
C264/EN HW/C80 Hardware
− Each transformer has two AC voltage ranges (VN): 57.73 Vrms to 130 Vrms or
220Vrms to 480 Vrms
Factory
N° Open Closed
setting
W1 No watching port 5 Fault watching Port 5 (Fx) Open
W3 Enable more aggressive back-off Enable less aggressive back-off Open
W4 Max length is 1536 byte Enable enforce the max frame Open
length for VLAN is 1522
W5 Enable half duplex back pressure Disable half duplex back pressure Open
W6 Continue sending frame regard- Enable to drop frame after 16 Open
less of number of collisions collisions
W7 Enable flow control Disable flow control Closed
W8 No priority reserve Enable 6KB priority buffer reserved Closed
W9 Half duplex for port 5 (Fx) Full duplex for port 5 (Fx) Closed
W10 Unlimited broadcast frames Enable 5% broadcast frame allowed Open
W11 Half duplex for port 6 (Fx) Full duplex for port 6 (Fx) Closed
W12 Enable 802.1p selected by Enable 802.1p field for all port Closed
EEPROM
W13 Share buffers up to 512 buffers Enable equal amount of buffers per Open
on a single port port (113 buffers)
C264/EN HW/C80 Hardware
OPEN CLOSE
Port 6
W12
Port 5 (optional)
LED1
LED2
LED3 Port 4
LED4
LED5
Port 3
LED6
W13
W4 Port 2
W3
W5
W6 W8
W7 W9
W10 W1 Port 1
W11
C0118ENa
SWU202 optical links: these 2 optical links are monitored; if one link comes down the default
is announced by the contacts (250V/5A):
1 Open
2 Common
1 2 3 3 Close
Close if default
C0119ENa
Hardware C264P/EN HW/C80
1 Default Rp-Es
2 Common
1 2 3 3 Default Rs-Ep
Close if default
C0121ENa
Switch management:
It is possible to manage the switch with the MDIO bus (J6).
Sub D 25 male
J2
8
1 9
MDC 2
3 11
4 18
19
20
21
22
C0122ENa
SWR200 SWR200
1
SWR200 SWR200
Patch Patch
Panel Panel
SWR200 SWR200
C0123ENa
Link budget 12 dB 19 dB
Connector loss (2) 0.8 dB 0.8 dB
Safety Margin 4 dB 4 dB
Allowed link attenuation 6.4 dB 13.4 dB
Typical cable attenuation 1 dB/km 0.4 dB/km
Maximum range 6.4 km 33 km
Link budget 12 dB 19 dB
Connector loss (6) 0.8 dB 0.8 dB
Patch loss (2) 2 dB 1 dB
Safety Margin 4 dB 4 dB
Allowed link attenuation -0.8 dB 8.2 dB
Typical cable attenuation 1 dB/km 0.4 dB/km
Maximum range 0 20 km
The values given above are only approximate ones. Always use cable and connector losses
as specified by the manufacturer.
Hardware C264P/EN HW/C80
LED
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
number
L1 Receive Link A
L2 Status Link A
L3 Receive Link B
L4 Status Link B
L5 Link and activity port 1 Off: no connection
Green: link
Green + blink: link + activity
L6 Link and activity port 2 «
L7 Link and activity port 3 «
L8 Link and activity port 4 «
L9 Speed port 1 Off: 10Mbps Green: 100Mbps
L10 Speed port 2 «
L11 Speed port 3 «
L12 Speed port 4 «
L13 Number of repeaters detected on the ring bit 0 Only the first 4 bits are visualized
L14 Number of repeaters detected on the ring bit 1 «
L15 Number of repeaters detected on the ring bit 2 «
L16 Number of repeaters detected on the ring bit 3 «
L17 Number of repeaters detected on the ring bit 4 Only the first 4 bits are visualized
L18 Number of repeaters detected on the ring bit 5 «
L19 Number of repeaters detected on the ring bit 6 «
L20 Number of repeaters detected on the ring bit 7 «
1 Default Link A
2 common
1 2 3 3 Default Link B
Close if default
C0297ENa
Hardware C264P/EN HW/C80
Switch management:
It is possible to manage the switch with the MDIO bus (J6).
Sub D 25 male
J2
8
1 9
MDC 2
3 11
4 18
19
20
21
22
C0122ENa
SWR200 SWR200
1
SWR200 SWR200
Patch Patch
Panel Panel
SWR200 SWR200
C0123ENa
C264/EN HW/C80 Hardware
Link budget 12 dB 19 dB
Connector loss (2) 0.8 dB 0.8 dB
Safety Margin 4 dB 4 dB
Allowed link attenuation 6.4 dB 13.4 dB
Typical cable attenuation 1 dB/km 0.4 dB/km
Maximum range 6.4 km 33 km
Link budget 12 dB 19 dB
Connector loss (6) 0.8 dB 0.8 dB
Patch loss (2) 2 dB 1 dB
Safety Margin 4 dB 4 dB
Allowed link attenuation -0.8 dB 8.2 dB
Typical cable attenuation 1 dB/km 0.4 dB/km
Maximum range 0 20 km
The values given above are only approximate ones. Always use cable and connector losses
as specified by the manufacturer.
Connecting Dual Homing.
Between 2 Dual Homing SWD20x
Rp LINK A
Rp
LINK A
Es
Es
SWD20x SWD20x
Rs
Rs LINK B
LINK B Ep
Ep
C0298ENa
Hardware C264P/EN HW/C80
Rp LINK A
Rp
LINK A
Es
Es
SWD20x SWD20x
Rs
Rs LINK B
LINK B Ep
Ep
Rp Rp
LINK A LINK A
Es Es
SWD20x SWD20x
Rs Rs
LINK B LINK B
Ep Ep
C0299ENa
C264/EN HW/C80 Hardware
• For IEC870-5-103 standard, the circle must be visible (light is sent for the “0” level)
• Otherwise the circle must be hidden (light is sent for the “1” level).
Optical characteristics:
• Connector type: ST
• Wavelength: 820 nm
• RS422 (4 wires): TA (+), TB(-), RA (+) and RA (-) are used. The circle must be hidden
• RS485 (2 wires): only TA (+), TB (-) are used. The circle must be visible
The indication on the module from bottom to top is as follows:
TA (+)
TB (-)
Ground
RA (+)
RB (-)
NOTE : There is no resistor to polarize the line.
Connections C264P/EN CO/C80
MiCOM C264P
CONNECTION
Connections C264P/EN CO/C80
CONTENT
2. CONNECTOR BLOCKS
2.1 I/O Connector Block
All the I/O connection uses a standard type of connector block with a 24-pin and 5.08 mm
pitch.
The I/O connector block characteristics are the following:
Parameter Value
Continuous rating 10 A
Connection method Screw M3
Cable size 1.0 - 2.5 mm2
Connection pitch 5,08 mm
Isolation to other terminal and to earth 300 V basic insulation
Standards UL, CSA
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
C0041ENa
Parameter Value
VT connection
Continuous rating 10 A
3 second rating 30 A
30 ms rating 250 A
Connection method Screw M4
Cable size 2 off 2.5 mm2
Isolation to other terminal and to earth 500 V basic insulation
CT connection
Continuous rating 20 A
10 second rating 150 A
1 second rating 500 A
Connection method Screw M4
Cable size 2 off 2.5 mm2 / 1 off 4 mm2
Isolation to other terminal and to earth 300 V basic insulation
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
C0042ENa
C0044ENa
C0045ENa
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C0046ENa
Cable crimp
Copper cable
minimum section: 2.5mm²
C0047ENb
• Screened multi-strand cable has to be used for digital input-output signals. For cables
within the cubicle the cable screen can be connected to the earth at both ends of the
cable. If the cable is taken beyond the system cubicle the cable screen should be
earthed at one end only to prevent current flowing in the screen due any differences in
ground potential.
• Screened and twisted pair has to be used for analogue input-output signals. The
screen is connected to the earth by the end of Bay Module side.
• One or two screened and twisted pairs have to be used for lower communication
signals. The screen is connected to the earth by two cable ends.
It is recommended to group cables and fit them as near as possible to an earth plane or to
an element of an earth wire-mesh.
C264/EN CO/C80 Connections
Protective
Functional earth Conductor (earth)
Terminal
Second example: MiCOM C264P fitted in a metallic cubicle with other devices.
Metallic cubicle
other device
Earth
Protective Conductor
(earth)
Pin n° Signal
1 Redundancy relay 2 - NO contact
2 Redundancy relay - common 1-2
3 Redundancy relay 1 - NO contact
4 Watchdog relay - NO contact
5 Watchdog relay - NC contact
6 Watchdog relay - common
7 Redundancy input - 1+
8 Redundancy input - common 1 / 2
9 Redundancy input - 2+
10
11
12 RS232: RxD RS485: B - Port 1
13 RS232: SG (0 V) - Port 1
14 RS232: TxD RS485: A - Port 1
15 RS232: SG (0 V) - Port 2
16 RS232: CTS - Port 2
17 RS232: RxD RS485 B RS422: TB - Port 2
18 RS232: TxD RS485 A RS422: TA - Port 2
19 RS232: RTS RS422: RB - Port 2
20 RS422: RA - Port 2
21 RS232: DCD - Port 2
22 Voltage input: Gnd Gnd
23 Voltage input: AC/DC (+)
24 Voltage input: AC/DC (─)
PIN
Output relays
1 O2
2
3 O1
4 Watchdog
5
6
7 V IN VIN
+ +
DI1 DI2
8
9
10
11 RS232/
12 RXD / TB RS485 Serial
link 1
13 SG (0 V)
14 TXD / TA
#
15
SG (0 V)
16 RS232/
CTS RS422
17
RXD / TB RS485 Serial
18 TXD / TA
RTS / RB
link 2
19
RA #
20
DCD
21
22
V aux
23 + Power
supply
24
C0050ENf
RS232:
− Supply C264 from two power supplies (Main and secondary) of the same range.
Pin n° Signal
1 Redundancy relay 2 NO contact
2 Redundancy relay common 1-2
3 Redundancy relay 1 NO contact
4 Watchdog relay NO contact
5 Watchdog relay NC contact
6 Watchdog relay common
7 Redundancy input 1+
8 Redundancy input common 1-2
9 Redundancy input 2+
10 Voltage source 2 : Secondary power supply DC( + )
11 Voltage source 2 : Secondary power supply DC( ─ )
12 Not Used
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
15 RS232: SG (0 V) Port 2
16 RS232: CTS Port 2
17 RS232: RxD RS485 B / RS422: TB Port 2
18 RS232: TxD RS485 A / RS422: TA Port 2
19 RS232: RTS RS422: RB Port 2
20 RS422: RA Port 2
21 RS232: DCD Port 2
22 Voltage source GND GND
23 Voltage source 1 : Main power supply DC( + )
24 Voltage source 1 : Main power supply DC( ─ )
RS485 / RS422 Case for Daisy chain and Pin n° 15 (SG) have to be earthed
equipements in the same The GND signal of the daisy chain
cubicle extremity have to be earthed.
RS485 / RS422 Case for daisy chain and The GND signal of the daisy chain
equipements in various extremity have not to be earthed.
cubicles
1 CD
2 RX
3 TX
4 5V ( for ECU20x supply)
5 SG (0 V)
6 Not used
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 Not used
C264/EN CO/C80 Connections
Connector DB 9
5
1
6 9
1
5
9 6
C0152ENa
1 TA (+)
2 TB (-)
3 Ground
4 RA (+)
5 RB (-)
TABLE 5: ECU201 - DESCRIPTION
To change the connection type, slide the tab:
• RS422 (4 wires): TA(+), TB(-), RA(+), RB(-) are used. The circle must be hidden.
• RS485 (2 wires): only TA(+) and TB(-) are used. The circle must be visible.
1 VIN VIN
+ DI1 + DI2
- -
2 - -
3
4 VIN VIN
+ DI3 + DI4
- -
5 - -
6
7 VIN VIN
+ DI5 + DI6
- -
8 - -
9
10 VIN VIN
+ DI7 + DI8
- -
11 - -
12
13 Digital Outputs
14 B
CO 1
15 A
16 A
17 B CO 2
18
19
20 B
CO 3
21 A
22 A
23 B CO 4
24
C0058ENa
1 VIN VIN
+ DI1 + DI2
- -
2 - -
4 VIN VIN
+ DI3 + DI4
- -
5 - -
7 VIN VIN
+ DI5 + DI6
- -
8 - -
10 VIN VIN
+ DI7 + DI8
- -
11 - -
12
13 VIN VIN
+ +
DI9 DI10
- -
14 - -
15
16 VIN VIN
+ +
-
DI11 -
DI12
17 - -
18
19 VIN VIN
+ DI13 + DI14
- -
20 - -
21
22 VIN VIN
+ DI15 + DI16
- -
23 - -
24
C0056ENa
1
2 DO 1
3
4 DO 2
5
6 DO 3
7
8 DO 4
9
10 DO 5
11
12 DO 6
13
14 DO 7
15
16 DO 8
17
18
19
20
DO 9
21
22
23
DO 10
24
C0057ENc
1 + U
2 - V AI 1
#
3 + U
4 - mA AI 1
#
5 Insulated
GND
6
GND
7 + U
8 - V AI 2
#
9 + U
10 - mA AI 2
#
11 Insulated
GND
12
GND
13 + U
14 - V AI 3
#
15 + U
16 - mA AI 3
#
17 Insulated
GND
18
GND
19 + U
20 - V AI 4
#
21 + U
22 - mA AI 4
#
23 Insulated
GND
24
GND
C0059ENb
PIN
Current inputs
Voltage inputs
C0363ENa
N° Description
1 External power supply +48V
2 NIL
3 External power supply (0V)
4 NIL
5 WDOG+
6 WDOG-
7 NIL
8 READ INHIBIT AO n° 1+
9 READ INHIBIT AO n° 1-
10 READ INHIBIT AO n° 2+
11 READ INHIBIT AO n° 2-
12 READ INHIBIT AO n° 3+
13 READ INHIBIT AO n° 3-
14 READ INHIBIT AO n° 4+
15 READ INHIBIT AO n° 4-
16 NIL
17 AO n° 1+
18 AO n° 1-
19 AO n° 2+
20 AO n° 2-
21 AO n° 3+
22 AO n° 3-
23 AO n° 4+
24 AO n° 4-
1 Open
2 Common
1 2 3 3 Close
Close if default
C0119ENa
Wiring recommendation:
Due to the proximity of the port 4 Ethernet connector, it is strongly recommended that the
“Fault signal connector” connections are visually checked before any hand manipulation of
the Ethernet connectors.
Particular attention is to be paid during the wiring phase, not to damage the cable’s isolation.
1 Default Rp-Es
2 Common
1 2 3 3 Default Rs-Ep
Close if default
C0121ENa
Wiring recommendation:
Due to the proximity of the port 4 Ethernet connector, it is strongly recommended that the
“Fault signal connector” connections are visually checked before any hand manipulation of
the Ethernet connectors.
Particular attention is to be paid during the wiring phase, not to damage the cable’s isolation.
C264/EN CO/C80 Connections
1 Default Link A
2 common
1 2 3 3 Default Link B
Close if default
C0297ENa
Wiring recommendation:
Due to the proximity of the port 4 Ethernet connector, it is strongly recommended that the
“Fault signal connector” connections are visually checked before any hand manipulation of
the Ethernet connectors.
Particular attention is to be paid during the wiring phase, not to damage the cable’s isolation.
Connections C264P/EN CO/C80
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
C0061ENa
BLANK PAGE
Installation C264P/EN IN/C80
MiCOM C264P
INSTALLATION
Installation C264P/EN IN/C80
CONTENT
2. REQUIREMENTS 4
2.1 MiCOM C264 4
2.2 Personal Computer 4
2.3 Communication wiring 4
3. DELIVERY RECEPTION 5
3.1 Packing inspection and opening 5
3.2 Delivery form checking 5
4. MECHANICAL MOUNTING 6
4.1 Rack mounting 6
4.2 Panel mounting 6
5. WIRING INSTALLATION 7
5.1 General wiring 7
5.2 Power supply wiring 7
5.3 I/O board wiring 7
5.4 Networks wiring 7
8. DOWNLOADING DATABASE 39
8.1 Database download with CAT 39
8.1.1 Loading DB under CAT 39
8.1.2 Download DB onto C264 39
8.2 Database download with SMT 40
8.2.1 Loading DB under SMT 40
8.2.2 Download DB onto C264 40
8.2.3 Switch to downloaded data base 40
• Delivery reception
• Mechanical fixation
• Networks wiring
• Network setting
2. REQUIREMENTS
MiCOM C264 boot setting and software installation is carried out using a Windows PC with
common utilities and serial/Ethernet link to the computer.
The PACiS CD-ROM System installation is needed to run the C264’s install software on the
Host PC.
2.1 MiCOM C264
The MiCOM C264 needs at least
• Computer IP address
3. DELIVERY RECEPTION
Delivery reception is composed of:
• Feeling up commissioning
3.1 Packing inspection and opening
On receipt of the unit, inform the delivery agent if there is any sign of damage.
Check the box for documentation, or computer hardware option added in the delivery form
like ribbon, screws, port extension etc.
3.2 Delivery form checking
The delivery form is based on the order form issued from CORTEC. It lists computer type,
boards (with supply, serial numbers and position in the rack) and options.
Verify that the composition of the device is as ordered.
Computer is delivered with the required connectors.
C264P/EN IN/C80 Installation
4. MECHANICAL MOUNTING
The chapter C264/EN HW gives the size of MiCOM C264 rack, the fixation diameters and
their position.
If electric screwdriver is used the torque limitation should be set to the small diameters of the
screws.
The MiCOM C264 can be mounted in racks or panel.
4.1 Rack mounting
MiCOM C264 may be rack mounted using single tier rack frames (our part number is
FX0021 001):
These frames have been designed to have dimensions in accordance with IEC60297 and
are supplied pre-assembled ready to use.
The two horizontal rails of the rack frame have holes drilled at approximately 26mm intervals
and C264 cases are attached via their mounting flanges using M4 Taptite self-tapping
screws with captive 3 mm thick washers to ensure a good earth contact (our part number is
ZB5865250).
It is possible to install two C264C side by side on the assembly panel or one C264.
Ensure that the computers are earthed, using the screw terminal on the rear of the unit.
4.2 Panel mounting
MiCOM C264 can be flush mounted into panels using M4 Taptite self-tapping screws with
captive 3 mm thick washers to ensure a good earth contact (our part number is ZB5865250).
Alternatively tapped holes can be used if the panel has a minimum thickness of 2.5 mm.
Where several MiCOM C264 are to be mounted in a single cut-out in the panel, it is advised
that they are mechanically grouped together horizontally and/or vertically to form rigid
assemblies prior to mounting in the panel.
NOTE: It is not advised that MiCOM C264 are fastened using pop rivets as
this will not allow the device to be easily removed from the panel in
the future if repair is necessary.
Installation C264P/EN IN/C80
5. WIRING INSTALLATION
Wiring has to be prepared before installation. The MiCOM C264 is delivered with required
connectors for I/O boards and Ethernet switches. The wire diameters stated in chapter
C264/EN CO are mandatory. Tighten the screws in a cross pattern (e.g. top left, then bottom
right etc), take care not to over torque the screws.
5.1 General wiring
Only two wires can be screwed together on any one MiCOM connector. The AC and DC
analogues, digital signal, and communication wires should use separate shielded cable.
From a practical point of view the power supply of each computer should have a switch
(MCB, link, or fuse) to turn off the power during installation and commissioning tests.
The MiCOM C264 description sheet describes the type of board Installed on each slot (C, D
etc.) It is very important to use it to correctly plug the connectors.
Connection diagrams of the C264 are given in chapter C264/EN CO. Wires should be
connected with the connector unplugged. Each wired signal has to be tested before plugging
and fixing the connectors. The connectors have to be fixed on the C264 case with the
screws available at each extremity of the connector.
For connection of the protective (earth) conductor please refer to the section 3.1 of the
Connections chapter (C264/EN CO)
5.2 Power supply wiring
The BIU connector wiring is vital as it provides the power supply. Power voltage should be
tested and checked to BIU reference defined in chapter C264/EN HW to ensure that supply
is compliant to BIU voltage.
The power has to be switched off before plugging in the connector.
5.3 I/O board wiring
Several DIU, CCU, BIU board voltage are available for Digital Input. Check that the DIU
voltage as stated on the delivery form matches with the nominal signal input before plugging
connector to the computer.
DOU and CCU, the board generates Digital Output with a defined inductive characteristic.
On the other side of the wire the inductance should be compliant. To avoid damage to the
DO board connected to inductive circuits it may be necessary to connect an anti-surge
diode.
5.4 Networks wiring
Network wiring can be fibre optic or copper. Fibre optic communication is an option, and
should be ordered as such along with the required mechanical modules. There are specific
rules governing the installation of fibre optics (refer to the chapter C264/EN CO). Specific
care should be taken with the bend radius of the fibres, and the use of optical shunts is not
recommended as these can degrade the transmission path over time.
Never look into the end of a fibre optic due to the risk of causing serious damage to the eye.
Copper networks should follow class recommendation and shielding. When using a Legacy
bus (with IED mounted in daisy chain), the correct resistor, at both ends only, should be
fitted (120 ohms for RS422 and RS485).
Copper Ethernet network have to stay inside a cubicle. Fibre optic has to be used between
cubicles.
C264P/EN IN/C80 Installation
For the use of SWR20x or SWD20x, the optical ring has to be connected as follows:
Rp Rp Rp
Es Es Es
SWR20x SWR20x SWR20x
Rs or Rs or Rs or
SWD20x SWD20x SWD20x
Ep Ep Ep
C0295ENa
Installation C264P/EN IN/C80
7.2 Prequisites
• A CD-ROM drive
• Framework NET 3.5 SP1 to upload the disturbance files (installer: dotnetfx.exe)
• WinPcap 4
• Antivirus Avira Antivir Professional Version 9.0 or later (that is recommended for
PERMA A2.15 architecture).
7.2.2 Overview
Two CDROMs are required: B7.20 and B7.21. Each installer is located in:
\System\Delivery\PACiS Va.b.c\C264 VX.YZ (Va.b.c is the PACiS system version, X.YZ is
the computer version).
The installers include several components:
• C264 rev. Z, with a bootrom to partition the flash memory in a new way
• WFTP, ftp server used to download software to MiCOM C264 (expert use)
FIGURE 1: EXTRACTING FILES FROM THE FRAMEWORK NET 3.5 SP1 INSTALLER
Choose the option I have read and ACCEPT the terms of the License Agreement, and Install
NOTE: The Framework 3.5 SP1 installation can take several minutes.
7.3.2 Computer Installation
Launch the setup from the B7.21 (or later) CDROM.
C264P/EN IN/C80 Installation
NOTE: If the dialog box below is displayed, cancel the computer Installation
and install the Framework NET 3.5 SP1 described on the previous
section §1.3.1.
To enlarge the Scan pane, collapse the Filter pane using the horizontal Auto hide toggle
button.
To enlarge the Work pane, collapse the left panes using the vertical Auto hide toggle button.
Select the HMI language among French, English:
<Installation folder>/CAT/Error_Reports is the destination folder for fault report. A fault report
might result from a window popping up, for example:
7.6 Settings
In case the PC has several network cards, click Select Network adapter and select the
desired card. Some cards are not fit for the CAT (NdisWan Adapter, MS TCP Loop back
interface…).
The selection is saved in the Registry. All the settings are restored at CAT's next start.
7.7 Scan
To carry an inventory of the networked computers, click Refresh; this populates the
computers' directory:
• Computer's IP address
• red: maintenance
• blue: stopped
• black: bootprom
• green: active
• grey: disconnected
To sort the items according to the values in a column, click the column header; this reveals a
clickable sorting sign or .
Installation C264P/EN IN/C80
To deny access to computer's information, click the computer's eye icon, the icon looks
crossed off; select Hide selected computers option and the computer selected is off.
To restore access, exit CAT using the upper corner red cross and restart it.
When Computer in maintenance the status shown in the close up line-: MAINT DATA BASE.
However when Computer is in Active state Close up line shows the Banner text if configured
in SCE else the space is blank.
− all the extensions with a given number (second drop-down list: 0 for main
computer thru 16)
Any means that the criterion has no effect.
To dim a computer's line, click the eye icon and select the box Hide selected computers.
To take mute computers off the list, click the link Clear disconnected computers.
NOTE: If a distant computer is not detected, download cyberdb_orig.xml on
computer flash/maint directory, using the CMT file explorer.
7.8 Connection to a computer
To select a computer, click on it in the directory; this displays the latest computer's name and
data base number (if any) in the close-up line.
To establish a communication with the computer, click Connect to this computer (or click two
times). A login window shows:
Four profiles are defined. Select one as a username and enter the password.
Depending on the security policy, the account might be locked out due to several incorrect
password typed in; in this event, ask the Security administrator to unlock it.
Several sessions cannot be open simultaneously. To change profile, click again Connect to
this computer.
Note for Auto Log Off: when operator's does not place applicative requests for longer than a
timeout, any further action requires a reconnection. To set the time-out, ask the Security
administrator. Default value: 10min.
Installation C264P/EN IN/C80
The Stop button is used to suspend all tasks except Synchro and Superv.
The Reboot button is used to reboot the computer.
Only the System administrator is entitled to access to the Boot and Stop buttons.
A vertical menu shows. The items give access to computer's updated information and allow
the databases managing. The list depends on the user's privileges and computer's mode.
The Log Off action is the reverse of the one of Connect to this computer.
The ribbon menu depends on the profiles:
The Security administrator accesses only a private item (see below). Detail of privileges:
BOOTPROM C264 stopped before the boot (whether a networkboot or flashboot / first count-down),
only the CAT can detect C264
STOPPED C264 stopped before the application launch after the boot (whether a networkboot or
flashboot / second count-down), or after a Stop command
MAINTENANCE Ready to receive a DB
ACTIVE Nominal state
STAND-BY Spare C264 in redundancy architecture
SIMULATION
FAULT DB issue (confirmed by reboot)
HALT The number of faults permitted per day (normally 5) is overrun
INITIALIZATION Transient state, no filter
Some operations might require the computer's mode changing. An operation can be
available for the main (or mono) rack (M) or even for an extension (A for All):
• Boards is a dashboard:
- status (reflected in the board name: green for present and configured, blue for
missing or not configured, red for configured but faulty)
As the changes of state may be frequent, an auto refresh occurs at each tab opening, and
can be triggered each 5 second for 1 min (box Automatic refresh).
Installation C264P/EN IN/C80
• IED Networks shows, for each computer's port, the link status of the IEDs (red for
mute, green for present) and lists the configured IEDs on the legacy bus (name,
connection state). A banner identical to that in LHMI and C264 shows (refer to
C264/EN HI chapter).
NOTE 1: In multirack configuration, extensions are also shown
NOTE 2: Tunnelling requires PatuSpy software and MiCOM S1
7.11.2 Manage database (subject to privilege)
A sketch illustrates the present configuration:
• both labels include versions number, order of downloading (DB1, DB2 ..), optional
attribute (Modified, Missing …)
The setting can be done in various ways (through the computer LHMI, through
downloading...). For more details, refer to the chapter C264/EN FT.
C264P/EN IN/C80 Installation
To download a database:
• browse the disk structure to select a versioned database archive (the USB port is out
of the scope):
• Click the button Select the SCE database; wait till a form shows (a maximum of 1 hour
is needed to transfer and store a 20 Mb file):
The drop-down list enrolls all the computers in this session's databases (<network
name in SCE>.adb)
• Assign to the computer one C264 in this list
Installation C264P/EN IN/C80
− select another data base through the link Select another SCE database
− To change the version number, select the box Substitute the database and type a
new Version Number
− To download also the mpc file (e.g. in RTU standalone configuration, where no
SMT is available), click Save the SCE database into the computer. In the
<DB_name>.zip, CAT selects and downloads the <BD_name>.mpc file. Only one
.mpc file can be archived (a new download deletes and replaces the previous file).
As VxWorks limits the file name to 8 characters, the downloaded file is renamed
“DB.zip”.
Start database
N-1 Z uploading
N Z
Sa <C264 Network name>.adb
DB_name.zip da ve th
t
the abas e SC
co e in E
mp t o
ute
r
Z
DB.zip
• Click the button Start database uploading; this updates the databases sketch and
displays a report of the downloading:
• To delete both databases, click clean all databases. This shows a disconnected mode.
7.11.3 Edit settings (subject to privilege)
Used to launch MiCOM S1. Refer to the chapter C264/EN ST.
CAT is disconnected for MiCOM S1 to take over.
A setting in MiCOM S1 results in the suffix Modified being appended to the database label.
C264P/EN IN/C80 Installation
− the computer's and database's information (in SCE, 'Device name' is called
'Network name' and 'Description' is Short name)
− the events that occurred whether automatically or manually driven, in the reverse
chronological order, in a tabular way: <date> <time> <object> <sub-object> <event
label> <state>; the cyber security events are preceded with the character @
C264 objects include #C264, HMILCD, MAINT (flash directory) …
The date and time are provided by C264 not by the CAT machine.
• Event Log Parameters and Printer Parameters tabs help you to choose the verbosity
of traces. The parameters are detailed in each information frame:
Installation C264P/EN IN/C80
"Disable event log storage" (default state) disables event log storage mechanism. The state
is updated in function information frame.
/null: no printer
"/Smc1/tty": serial port on front panel (setting or shell connector)
"/Scc1/tty": port 1 on BIU
"/Scc2/tty": port 2 on BIU
"/Scc4/tty": port 4 on Cpu3 board (rear side)
− Suppress: number of suppressed lines when the buffer is full (typical value: 300)
− Buffer size used by the PRINT task to sock lines (typical value: 1000)
VALUES
− Binary inputs
− Measurements
− Counters
7.11.7 Waveforms
The list of disturbance files is displayed in the text area.
To refresh it, press Refresh.
• Click the button Transfer waveforms from the computer to this directory. All the files
are uploaded.
The button Clear all waveforms is used to erase the Fast Waveform from MiCOM C264P
flash memory.
Installation C264P/EN IN/C80
− Computer total usage duration: number of hours the computer has been running
(located in in /flash/MAINT/ophours)
• The second section is used to set a time and date value and send it to the computer.
If the box Synchronize with Windows time is checked, the Current computer time cannot be
set: the current date and time are taken from Windows XP on the PC and displayed.
Set year button: it is useful to set only the Year on a new C264 because the IRIG B signal
does not include the Year data; the new C264 gets the default Year value from Windows XP.
• The third section specifies what defines the seasonal clock shifts:
− Make sure that the CAT is connected to the SNTP master server
• The first section allows to know and modify the disk the computer boots on:
− Network boot, that is using ftp (the IP address is in the second section)
• The third section allows to assign addresses to the racks in a multi-rack configuration
A group is a cluster including a main rack and several secondary racks. Main 2 means the
computer serves as a back up to the Main 1 one (redundancy).
• The fourth section allows to access the password required to log in WFTD (it is set in
WFTPD/Security/User-rights)
For the new parameters to be effective, click Apply parameters (click anywhere in the pane
first, if the button is dimmed).
7.12.3 Manage communication ports
It is possible to disable some communication ports for all users:
• a Shell: e.g. HyperTerminal through the serial front port (it applies only to Rx on C264
side; Tx is always active, for debugging purpose)
• Telnet: see further; if it has been disabled, restart the C264 after re-enabling Telnet.
• Ethernet port No 2: Cpu3 board second port; it can be used to separate IEC61850
flows and Scada flows, reports and gooses, etc. For more details, refer to the chapter
3.5 in C264/EN FT. In Multirack configuration, it must be enabled as it is used for inter-
rack communication.
C264P/EN IN/C80 Installation
The files name cannot be changed; only files with DOS name format (8. 3 character format)
can be copied.
To format the flash memory:
• Click the Format flash memory button and wait till the end.
NOTE: The passwords and logoff time-outs are spared by this operation.
C264P/EN IN/C80 Installation
The "logout" command or the windows close can be used to terminate the session.
As Telnet is launched independently of CAT, multi sessions on two or more computers are
possible.
As Telnet used TCP/IP stack, the computer has to be accessible from the PC in this mode.
Installation C264P/EN IN/C80
• Management: all the parameters are profile-specific, but valid for all of the three clients
(LHMI, CAT, MiCOM S1): a strong password is desirable (refer to PACiS/EN CS
chapter), 8 characters are indispensable
To unlock an account (observer/system engineer/ system administrator):
Settings:
Setting cycle: select account, fill up the form, press Apply Settings, wait for the report, cycle.
• Security log reading: it is a subset of event logs: the events that occurred whether
automatically or manually driven, in the reverse chronological order, in a tabular way:
<date> <time> < HMI where event occurred > <profile><event type>
<state><description> the HMI field is empty if the log entry is generated at C264 init
for status of port:
C264P/EN IN/C80 Installation
Event types:
− Login/Log off
− Antivirus status
− Telnet de-/activated
8. DOWNLOADING DATABASE
MiCOM C264 requires a database to operate. It stores up to two databases, named “current”
and “stand-by”. Only the current database is used for operation. The second database can
be downloaded when the computer is in operational or maintenance mode. A specific control
allows switching between the two stored databases.
PACiS SCE (System Configuration Editor) is used to generate the databases. SMT (System
Management Tool) or CAT (Computer Administration Tool) are used to download and switch
the databases.
The use of SMT or CAT depends on the number of computers. For several computers on the
same Ethernet network, it is recommended to use SMT in order to insure database
coherency between computers.
8.1 Database download with CAT
8.1.1 Loading DB under CAT
First action is to copy the .zip database issued from SCE on your PC.
8.1.2 Download DB onto C264
On the CAT application:
− Click the “Select a Data base version” button, choose the bd.x.xx.zip file
corresponding to the database you want to use and click on “OK”; as a result, the .adb
files in the archive are transferred in the folder <installation folder>/computer/cat/db
− In the “Choose your Download” list, choose the “Database Only” item; this
opens a dialog box where you choose one “.adb” file of your computer and click on
“OK”
− When it is done, click on “Switch data bases” button; the MiCOM C264 computer
restarts on the database you have downloaded. It starts in operational mode.
Remark: On standalone C264 application (C264 not associated to any other
PACiS IEC61850 equipment), the source database (MPC file) can be
stored on the CPU270 (up to 20MB file size); this will be possible by
selecting “DATABASE + MPC, on the download list box:
NOTE: Do not put your archive on the desktop nor in the MyDocuments folder
(the path must no include blanks).
C264P/EN IN/C80 Installation
• IRIG B connection
• Printer
10.1 External master clock connection
With the option of the CPU board, an external standard BNC connection is used to receive
external master clock synchronisation. The recommended external master clock is the hopf
6870 radio clock.
Installation should follow the standard rules of BNC cable installation including length limit
and optional 50 ohms termination.
For installation of the external master clock, refer to its documentation and to the summary in
PACiS system/EN IN chapter.
External IRIG B synchronisation should be configured in the computer database.
10.2 Printer installation
A printer can be installed permanently for the SOE, or temporally for
commissioning/maintenance use. Data labelling is defined with PACiS SCE.
The printer should be connected to either port 1, 2, 3 or port 4 of the computer.
If the port is on the BIU board, the board has to be configured for RS232 by using the correct
jumper configuration.
Furthermore, a configuration file (included in database) has to be installed onto the computer
with the printer communication parameters.
Settings C264P/EN ST/C80
MiCOM C264P
SETTINGS
Settings C264P/EN ST/C80
CONTENT
4. MICOM S1 (MS1) 41
4.1 Presentation of parameters in MiCOM S1 41
4.2 Upload a setting file to C264 43
4.2.1 How to send setting files to C264 43
4.2.2 How to navigate into MICOM S1 44
4.2.3 How to edit online C264 values 44
4.2.4 Edit ARPCCN parameters 45
4.2.5 Activate/de-Activate protection function trip 46
4.2.6 Edit AUTORECLOSER ( TYPE 1 ) parameters 46
4.2.7 Edit I²t parameters 47
4.3 Download a setting file from C264 48
4.4 The different computer modes of C264 49
4.5 MiCOM S1 acknowledge 50
C264P/EN ST/C80 Settings
BLANK PAGE
Settings C264P/EN ST/C80
Tree panel is accessible from bay panels by selecting the following key:
All data points are grouped into features and folders. To access a given feature the operator
should navigate the panels using the arrow keys. The folders hierarchy is displayed in each
panel.
go up to father folder
At the bottom of the hierarchy, the folder is the single point of information, control or
parameter. Edit mode allows the operator to change values.
Enter into Edit mode. It then asks to enter the system engineer password.
The most commonly used settings and controls are selected into a list. To browse the list the
operator navigates using the arrow keys. The modification/control sequence is cancelled by
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- FIRST CYCLE TRI [100;60000](10)(ms) Time between the first
protection trip and the
Circuit Breaker close
order for a 3 phases
trip
- SECOND CYCLE [1000;3600000](1000)(ms) Time between the
second protection trip
and the Circuit Breaker
close order
- THIRD CYCLE [1000;3600000](1000)(ms) Time between the third
protection trip and the
Circuit Breaker close
order
- FOURTH CYCLE [1000;3600000](1000)(ms) Time between the
fourth protection trip
and the Circuit Breaker
close order
- RECLAIM TIME [1000;600000](1000)(ms) Time during which the
Circuit Breaker must
remain closed to
consider that the
reclose has succeeded
- UNLOCK TIME [1000;600000](1000)(ms) Time during which the
Circuit Breaker must
remain closed after a
manual close or reinit
message in the lock
state to consider that
the unlocked has
succeeded
- MAN CLOSE TIME [1000;600000](1000)(ms) Time during which the
Circuit Breaker must
remain closed after a
manual close in clear
state to consider that
the closure has
succeeded and to
avoid locking
definitively in case of
trip
- 1PH TRIP SCHEME 0 to 4 Indicates how to use
the autorecloser with 1
phase trip:
0: AR_NOT_USED
1: AR_1P
2: AR_1P3P
3: AR_1P3P3P
4: AR_1P3P3P3P
Settings C264P/EN ST/C80
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- 3PH TRIP SCHEME 0 to 4 Indicates how to use
the autorecloser with 3
phases trip:
0: AR_NOT_USED
1: AR_3P
2: AR_3P3P
3: AR_3P3P3P
4: AR_3P3P3P3P
DEVICE
short name 1
…
short name N
- TIME OPEN [0;1000](1)(ms) Time duration for the
open contact
- TIME CLOSE [0;1000](1)(ms) Time duration for the
close contact
BI
Bi 1
…
Bi N
- MOTION00 FILT [0;600](100)(ms) Time of non
complementarity
filtering in the state 00:
only use for double
digital input
- MOTION11 FILT [0;600](100)(ms) Time of non
complementarity
filtering in the state 11:
only use for double
digital input
- PERS OPEN FILT [0;1200](100)(ms) Time of persistence
filtering in the state
Open or 0
- PERS CLOSE FILT [0;1200](100)(ms) Time of persistence
filtering in the state
Close or 1
- TOGGLING OPTION YES, NO Flag to validate or
inhibit the The toggling
option
MV
Mv 1
…
Mv N
- HYSTERESIS [1;50](1)(%) % of hysteresis applied
on thresholds
- DEADBAND [1;50](1)(%) % of variation within
the Analogue Input is
not transmitted
- THRESHOLD 1 [Min;Max](0.01)(XXX) Low low low threshold
(Lowest threshold of
the analogue input)
C264P/EN ST/C80 Settings
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- THRESHOLD 2 [Min;Max](0.01)(XXX) Low low threshold
- THRESHOLD 3 [Min;Max](0.01)(XXX) Low threshold
- THRESHOLD 4 [Min;Max](0.01)(XXX) High threshold
- THRESHOLD 5 [Min;Max](0.01)(XXX) High high threshold
- THRESHOLD 6 [Min;Max](0.01)(XXX) High high high
threshold (highest
threshold of the
analogue input)
COMM. PORT
Com 1
…
Com 4
- BAUDRATE baudrate * Baudrate of the
communication port
among:
50,100,200,300,600,12
00,2400,4800,9600,19
200,38400, 56000
- NB STOP BIT 1, 2 Number of stop bits
- NB BIT PER CHAR 7, 8 Number of bits per
character
- PARITY odd, even, none Parity
HMI
MAIN
- EXIT MT TIME [5;300](1)(s) Time after which the
Menu tree is
automatically left if
there is no pressed
button
- BACK LIGHT DELAY [5;300](1)(s) Time after which the
back light disappears if
there is no pressed
button
- SELECT EXIT TIME [5;300](1)(s) Maximum time
between selection and
execution orders
- BYPASS DELAY [20;120](1)(s) Time after which a
bypass is automatically
deselected
BAY
Bay 0
…
Bay N
- SBMC DISPLAY YES, NO Flag to validate or
inhibit the display of
the SBMC mode
Settings C264P/EN ST/C80
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- DISPLAY DEV NAME YES, NO Flag to validate or
inhibit the display of
the Name od Devices
in the Bay Panel
CONFIG
COMPUTER
PROTECTION
- PERSONNALISATION
- Flag Edition General On, Off issued from the SCE
database
- Description PACiS Compter Fixe
- Factory reference AREVA Fixe
- Model C264P Fixe
- IP address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Ethernet IP address
normaly issued from
the SCE database
- Computer Name 8 characters Ethernet device name
normaly issued from
the SCE database
- DB version XX.YY issued from the SCE
database
- GENERAL
- IN 1A, 5A Current nominal value
issued from the SCE
database
- UN 57-130V, 220-480V Voltage nominal value
issued from the SCE
database
- IA IB IC MIN 0.001430A, 0.007208A Minimal Phase current
value issued from the
SCE database
- UA UB UC MIN 0.009V, 0.034V Minimal Phase Voltage
value issued from the
SCE database
-SENSIBILITY Normal, Sensitive, Very Earth current input
Sensitive range issued from the
SCE database
- IN MIN 0.001430A, 0.000286A, Minimal Phase current
0,000034A, 0,007208A, value issued from the
0.001442A, 0.000182A SCE database
- FREQ 50HZ, 60HZ Frequency nominal
value issued from the
SCE database
C264P/EN ST/C80 Settings
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
-PROTECTION GROUP 1 Parameters Groupe 1
- [67] MAX I DIR Heading of [67/50/51]
submenu
- I> ? OFF, ON, DIR Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for phase OC
(I>)
- I> VALUE 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In. for the alarm threshold
- I> DELAY TYPE DMT, STI (CEI), SI (CEI), Displays threshold
VI(CEI), EI (CEI), LTI (CEI), delay time type
STI (CO2), MI (ANSI), LTI
(CO8),VI (ANSI), EI (ANSI),
RECT, RI
- t I> ? 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- TMS 0.025 to 3.2, in steps of Displays TMS value for
0.025 the IDMT curve
-K 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.01 Selection of K value for
the RI curve
- treset 40ms to 100 s, in steps of Displays setting value
10ms for the reset time (IEC
curve only)
- RTMS 0.025 to 3.200, in steps of Displays the RTMS
0.025 value associated with
the IDMT reset time
choice (ANSI & CO
curves only)
- I> TORQUE 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays setting value
for the torque angle
- I> TRIP ZONE ±10° to ±170°, in steps of Displays angle value
1°. for the Trip Zone
- I> >> >>> Interlock OFF, ON Interlock of first
threshold by the
second and third
thresholds
- I>> ? ON, OFF, DIR Selection of the
second alarm
threshold function for
phase OC (I>>)
- I>> VALUE 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In. for the alarm threshold
- I>> DELAY TYPE DMT, STI (CEI), SI (CEI), Displays threshold
VI(CEI), EI (CEI), LTI (CEI), delay time type
STI (CO2), MI (ANSI), LTI
(CO8),VI (ANSI), EI (ANSI),
RECT, RI
- t I>> ? 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
Settings C264P/EN ST/C80
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- TMS 0.025 o 3.2, in steps of Displays TMS value for
0.025 the IEC curve
-K 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.01 Selection of K value for
the RI curve
- treset 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the reset time (IEC
curve only)
- RTMS 0.025 to 3.200, in steps of Displays the RTMS
0.025 value associated with
the IDMT reset time
choice (ANSI & CO
curves only)
- I>> TORQUE 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays setting value
for the torque angle
- I>> TRIP ZONE ±10° to ±170°, in steps of Displays angle value
1°. for the Trip Zone
- I>>> ? ON, OFF, DIR Selection of the third
alarm threshold
function for phase OC
(I>>>)
- I>>> VALUE 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In. for the alarm threshold
- t I>>> ? 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- I>>> TORQUE 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays setting value
for the torque angle
- I>>> TRIP ZONE ±10° to ±170°, in steps of Displays angle value
1°. for the Trip Zone
- [67N] Earth OC Heading of
[50N/51N/67N]
submenu
- Ie> ? OFF, ON, DIR Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for earth OC
(Ie>)
- Ie> VALUE 0.1 to 25 Ien, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 Ien. for the alarm threshold
- Ie> DELAY TYPE DMT, STI (CEI), SI (CEI), Displays threshold
VI(CEI), EI (CEI), LTI (CEI), delay time type
STI (CO2), MI (ANSI), LTI
(CO8),VI (ANSI), EI (ANSI),
RECT, RI
- t eI> ? 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- TMS 0.025 to 3.2, in steps of Displays TMS value for
0.025 the IDMT curve
-K 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.01 Selection of K value for
the RI curve
C264P/EN ST/C80 Settings
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Reset delay type DMT, IDMT Displays the reset
delay time type
- treset 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the reset time for
IEC curves only
- RTMS 0.025 to 3.200, in steps of Displays the RTMS
0.025 value associated with
the IDMT reset time
choice for ANSI & CO
curves only
- Ie> TORQUE 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays setting value
for the torque angle
- Ie> TRIP ZONE 10° to 170°, in steps of 1°. Displays angle value
for the Trip Zone
- Ie> MIN V 1 to 260V, in step of 0.1V
- Ie> >> >>> Interlock OFF, ON Interlock of first
threshold by the
second and third
thresholds
- Ie>> ? ON, OFF, DIR Selection of the
second alarm
threshold function for
earth OC (Ie>>)
- Ie>> VALUE 0.1 to 40 Ien, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 Ien. for the alarm threshold
- Ie>> DELAY TYPE DMT, STI (CEI), SI (CEI), Displays threshold
VI(CEI), EI (CEI), LTI (CEI), delay time type
STI (CO2), MI (ANSI), LTI
(CO8),VI (ANSI), EI (ANSI),
RECT, RI
- t Ie>> ? 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- TMS 0.025 to 3.2, in steps of Displays TMS value for
0.025 the IEC curves
-K 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.01 Selection of K value for
the RI curve
- Reset delay type DMT, IDMT Displays the reset
delay time type
- treset 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the reset time for
IEC curves only
- RTMS 0.025 to 3.200, in steps of Displays the RTMS
0.025 value associated with
the IDMT reset time
choice for ANSI & COx
curves only
- Ie>> TORQUE 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays setting value
for the torque angle
- Ie>> TRIP ZONE 10° to 170°, in steps of 1°. Displays angle value
for the Trip Zone
Settings C264P/EN ST/C80
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Ie>> MIN V 1 to 260V, in step of 0.1V
- Ie>>> ? ON, OFF, DIR Selection of the third
alarm threshold
function for earth OC
(Ie>>>)
- eI>>> VALUE 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In. for the alarm threshold
- t Ie>>> ? 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- Ie>>> TORQUE 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays setting value
for the torque angle
- Ie>>> TRIP ZONE 10° to 170°, in steps of 1°. Displays angle value
for the Trip Zone
- Ie>>> MIN V 1 to 260V, in step of 0.1V
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- tf4 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- [81] f5? OFF, NU, NU, NU, NU, Selection of the fitht
MIN, MAX alarm threshold
function for Frequency
function
- f5 VALUE fn – 10 Hz to fn + 10 Hz , in Displays setting value
steps of 0,01 Hz for the alarm threshold
- tf5 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- [81] f6? OFF, NU, NU, NU, NU, Selection of the sixth
MIN, MAX alarm threshold
function for Frequency
function
- f6 VALUE fn – 10 Hz to fn + 10 Hz , in Displays setting value
steps of 0,01 Hz for the alarm threshold
- tf6> 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- VminFrequencyEnable 5 to 130 V, in steps of 0.1V Displays setting value
if Un range 57-130V of the minimum voltage
or to run [81] fct
20 to 480 V, in steps of
0.1V if Un range 220-
480V
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- df/dt2 Id 0 to 6, in steps of 1A Displays setting value
for the ferquency
threshold [81R] 2
- df/dt3? OFF, ON Selection of the third
alarm threshold
function for Frequency
Rate of
Changefunction
- df/dt3 VALUE – 10 Hz/s to + 10 Hz/s, in Displays setting value
steps of 0,1 Hz/s for the alarm threshold
- t df/dt3 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- df/dt3 Id 0 to 6, in steps of 1A Displays setting value
for the ferquency
threshold [81R] 3
- df/dt4? OFF, ON Selection of the fourtht
alarm threshold
function for Frequency
Rate of
Changefunction
- df/dt4 VALUE – 10 Hz/s to + 10 Hz/s, in Displays setting value
steps of 0,1 Hz/s for the alarm threshold
- t df/dt4 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- df/dt4 Id 0 to 6, in steps of 1A Displays setting value
for the frequency
threshold [81R] 4
- df/dt5? OFF, ON Selection of the fifth
alarm threshold
function for Frequency
Rate of
Changefunction
- df/dt5 VALUE – 10 Hz/s to + 10 Hz/s, in Displays setting value
steps of 0,1 Hz/s for the alarm threshold
- t df/dt5 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- df/dt5 Id 0 to 6, in steps of 1A Displays setting value
for the frequency
threshold [81R] 5
- df/dt6? OFF, ON Selection of the sixth
alarm threshold
function for Frequency
Rate of
Changefunction
- df/dt6 VALUE – 10 Hz/s to + 10 Hz/s, in Displays setting value
steps of 0,1 Hz/s for the alarm threshold
- t df/dt6 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
C264P/EN ST/C80 Settings
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- df/dt6 Id 0 to 6, in steps of 1A Displays setting value
for the frequency
threshold [81R] 6
- AverageNumber 5 to 100, in steps of 1 Display setting value to
calculate DF/DT based
on instantaneous df/dt
- ConfirmationNumber 2, 4 Display setting value to
confirm df/dt detection,
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- V<< ? OFF, NU, NU, AND, OR Selection of the
second alarm
threshold function for
phase Over Voltage
function
- V<< VALUE 2 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V Displays setting value
if Un range 57-130V for the alarm threshold
or
10 to 960V, in steps of 0.1V
if Un range 220-480V
- tV<< 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- [59N] Residual Over Voltage Heading of [59N]
submenu
- Un> ? OFF, ON Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for Residual
Over Voltage function
- Un> VALUE 1 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V Displays setting value
if Un range 57-130V for the alarm threshold
or
5 to 960V, in steps of 0.1V
if Un range 220-480V
- tUn> 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- [32N] Earth Wattmetric Heading of [32N]
submenu
- Pe> ? OFF, ON Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for Pe>.
- Pe> Range 57 to 130V Displays setting values
for the alarm threshold
0.2 to 20W
Pe>.
4 to 160W
10 to 800W
Range 220 to 480V
1 to 80W
4 to 640W
40 to 3200W
- Pe> Delay type DMT, STI (CEI), SI (CEI), Displays threshold
VI(CEI), EI (CEI), LTI (CEI), delay time type
STI (CO2), MI (ANSI), LTI
(CO8),VI (ANSI), EI (ANSI),
RECT, RI
- t Pe> 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold.
- TMS 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of Displays TMS value for
0.025 the IDMT curves
C264P/EN ST/C80 Settings
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
-K 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.005 Selection of K value for
the RI curve
- treset 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the reset time for
IEC curves only
- RTMS 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of Displays the RTMS
0.025 value associated with
the IDMT reset time
choice for ANSI & COx
curves only
- Pe> >? No, Yes Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for Pe>>.
- Pe>> Range 57 to 130V Displays setting values
for the alarm threshold
0.2 to 20W
Pe>>.
4 to 160W
10 to 800W
Range 220 to 480V
1 to 80W
4 to 640W
40 to 3200W
- t Pe>> 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold.
- Pe> Pe>> 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays the setting
angle for Pe. This item
is only activated if at
least one of the Pe
thresholds is enabled.
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
-K 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.005 Selection of K value for
the RI curve
- treset 40 to 100 s, in steps of Displays setting value
10ms for the reset time
- RTMS 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of Displays the RTMS
0.025 value associated with
the IDMT reset time
choice
- I2>> ? OFF, ON Selection of the
second alarm
threshold function for
Negative Phase
Sequence OC (I2>>)
- I2>> VALUE 0.5 to 40 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In. for the alarm threshold
- tI2>> 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- I2>>> ? OFF, ON Selection of the third
alarm threshold
function for Negative
Phase Sequence OC
(I2>>>)
- I2>>> VALUE 0.5 to 40 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In. for the alarm threshold
- tI2>>> 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- th Alarm VALUE 50 to 200%, in steps of Displays the
0.01 percentage applicable
to the thermal overload
alarm threshold
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- I> TRIP ZONE ±10° to ±170°, in steps of Displays angle value
1°. for the Trip Zone
- I> >> >>> Interlock OFF, ON Interlock of first
threshold by the
second and third
thresholds
- I>> ? ON, OFF, DIR Selection of the
second alarm
threshold function for
phase OC (I>>)
- I>> VALUE 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In. for the alarm threshold
- I>> DELAY TYPE DMT, STI (CEI), SI (CEI), Displays threshold
VI(CEI), EI (CEI), LTI (CEI), delay time type
STI (CO2), MI (ANSI), LTI
(CO8),VI (ANSI), EI (ANSI),
RECT, RI
- t I>> ? 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- TMS 0.025 o 3.2, in steps of Displays TMS value for
0.025 the IEC curve
-K 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.01 Selection of K value for
the RI curve
- treset 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the reset time (IEC
curve only)
- RTMS 0.025 to 3.200, in steps of Displays the RTMS
0.025 value associated with
the IDMT reset time
choice (ANSI & CO
curves only)
- I>> TORQUE 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays setting value
for the torque angle
- I>> TRIP ZONE ±10° to ±170°, in steps of Displays angle value
1°. for the Trip Zone
- I>>> ? ON, OFF, DIR Selection of the third
alarm threshold
function for phase OC
(I>>>)
- I>>> VALUE 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In. for the alarm threshold
- t I>>> ? 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- I>>> TORQUE 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays setting value
for the torque angle
- I>>> TRIP ZONE ±10° to ±170°, in steps of Displays angle value
1°. for the Trip Zone
C264P/EN ST/C80 Settings
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- [67N] Earth OC Heading of
[50N/51N/67N]
submenu
- Ie> ? OFF, ON, DIR Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for earth OC
(Ie>)
- Ie> VALUE 0.1 to 25 Ien, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 Ien. for the alarm threshold
- Ie> DELAY TYPE DMT, STI (CEI), SI (CEI), Displays threshold
VI(CEI), EI (CEI), LTI (CEI), delay time type
STI (CO2), MI (ANSI), LTI
(CO8),VI (ANSI), EI (ANSI),
RECT, RI
- t eI> ? 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- TMS 0.025 to 3.2, in steps of Displays TMS value for
0.025 the IDMT curve
-K 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.01 Selection of K value for
the RI curve
- Reset delay type DMT, IDMT Displays the reset
delay time type
- treset 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the reset time for
IEC curves only
- RTMS 0.025 to 3.200, in steps of Displays the RTMS
0.025 value associated with
the IDMT reset time
choice for ANSI & CO
curves only
- Ie> TORQUE 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays setting value
for the torque angle
- Ie> TRIP ZONE 10° to 170°, in steps of 1°. Displays angle value
for the Trip Zone
- Ie> MIN V 1 to 260V, in step of 0.1V
- Ie> >> >>> Interlock OFF, ON Interlock of first
threshold by the
second and third
thresholds
- Ie>> ? ON, OFF, DIR Selection of the
second alarm
threshold function for
earth OC (Ie>>)
- Ie>> VALUE 0.1 to 40 Ien, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 Ien. for the alarm threshold
- Ie>> DELAY TYPE DMT, STI (CEI), SI (CEI), Displays threshold
VI(CEI), EI (CEI), LTI (CEI), delay time type
STI (CO2), MI (ANSI), LTI
(CO8),VI (ANSI), EI (ANSI),
RECT, RI
Settings C264P/EN ST/C80
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- t Ie>> ? 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- TMS 0.025 to 3.2, in steps of Displays TMS value for
0.025 the IEC curves
-K 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.01 Selection of K value for
the RI curve
- Reset delay type DMT, IDMT Displays the reset
delay time type
- treset 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the reset time for
IEC curves only
- RTMS 0.025 to 3.200, in steps of Displays the RTMS
0.025 value associated with
the IDMT reset time
choice for ANSI & COx
curves only
- Ie>> TORQUE 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays setting value
for the torque angle
- Ie>> TRIP ZONE 10° to 170°, in steps of 1°. Displays angle value
for the Trip Zone
- Ie>> MIN V 1 to 260V, in step of 0.1V
- Ie>>> ? ON, OFF, DIR Selection of the third
alarm threshold
function for earth OC
(Ie>>>)
- eI>>> VALUE 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In. for the alarm threshold
- t Ie>>> ? 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- Ie>>> TORQUE 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays setting value
for the torque angle
- Ie>>> TRIP ZONE 10° to 170°, in steps of 1°. Displays angle value
for the Trip Zone
- Ie>>> MIN V 1 to 260V, in step of 0.1V
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- [81] f2? OFF, NU, NU, NU, NU, Selection of the
MIN, MAX second alarm
threshold function for
Frequency function
- f2 VALUE fn – 10 Hz to fn + 10 Hz , in Displays setting value
steps of 0,01 Hz for the alarm threshold
- tf2 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- [81] f3? OFF, NU, NU, NU, NU, Selection of the Third
MIN, MAX alarm threshold
function for Frequency
function
- f3 VALUE fn – 10 Hz to fn + 10 Hz , in Displays setting value
steps of 0,01 Hz for the alarm threshold
- tf3 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- [81] f4? OFF, NU, NU, NU, NU, Selection of the fourth
MIN, MAX < alarm threshold
function for Frequency
function
- f4 VALUE fn – 10 Hz to fn + 10 Hz , in Displays setting value
steps of 0,01 Hz for the alarm threshold
- tf4 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- [81] f5? OFF, NU, NU, NU, NU, Selection of the fitht
MIN, MAX alarm threshold
function for Frequency
function
- f5 VALUE fn – 10 Hz to fn + 10 Hz , in Displays setting value
steps of 0,01 Hz for the alarm threshold
- tf5 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- [81] f6? OFF, NU, NU, NU, NU, Selection of the sixth
MIN, MAX alarm threshold
function for Frequency
function
- f6 VALUE fn – 10 Hz to fn + 10 Hz , in Displays setting value
steps of 0,01 Hz for the alarm threshold
- tf6> 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- VminFrequencyEnable 5 to 130 V, in steps of 0.1V Displays setting value
if Un range 57-130V of the minimum voltage
or to run [81] fct
20 to 480 V, in steps of
0.1V if Un range 220-
480V
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- df/dt1? OFF, ON Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for Frequency
Rate of
Changefunction
- df/dt1 VALUE – 10 Hz/s to + 10 Hz/s, in Displays setting value
steps of 0,1 Hz/s for the alarm threshold
- t df/dt1 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- df/dt1 Id 0 to 6, in steps of 1A Displays setting value
for the ferquency
threshold [81R] 1
- df/dt2? OFF, ON Selection of the
secondt alarm
threshold function for
Frequency Rate of
Changefunction
- df/dt2 VALUE – 10 Hz/s to + 10 Hz/s, in Displays setting value
steps of 0,1 Hz/s for the alarm threshold
- t df/dt2 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- df/dt2 Id 0 to 6, in steps of 1A Displays setting value
for the ferquency
threshold [81R] 2
- df/dt3? OFF, ON Selection of the third
alarm threshold
function for Frequency
Rate of
Changefunction
- df/dt3 VALUE – 10 Hz/s to + 10 Hz/s, in Displays setting value
steps of 0,1 Hz/s for the alarm threshold
- t df/dt3 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- df/dt3 Id 0 to 6, in steps of 1A Displays setting value
for the ferquency
threshold [81R] 3
- df/dt4? OFF, ON Selection of the fourtht
alarm threshold
function for Frequency
Rate of
Changefunction
- df/dt4 VALUE – 10 Hz/s to + 10 Hz/s, in Displays setting value
steps of 0,1 Hz/s for the alarm threshold
- t df/dt4 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- df/dt4 Id 0 to 6, in steps of 1A Displays setting value
for the frequency
threshold [81R] 4
C264P/EN ST/C80 Settings
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- df/dt5? OFF, ON Selection of the fifth
alarm threshold
function for Frequency
Rate of
Changefunction
- df/dt5 VALUE – 10 Hz/s to + 10 Hz/s, in Displays setting value
steps of 0,1 Hz/s for the alarm threshold
- t df/dt5 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- df/dt5 Id 0 to 6, in steps of 1A Displays setting value
for the frequency
threshold [81R] 5
- df/dt6? OFF, ON Selection of the sixth
alarm threshold
function for Frequency
Rate of
Changefunction
- df/dt6 VALUE – 10 Hz/s to + 10 Hz/s, in Displays setting value
steps of 0,1 Hz/s for the alarm threshold
- t df/dt6 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- df/dt6 Id 0 to 6, in steps of 1A Displays setting value
for the frequency
threshold [81R] 6
- AverageNumber 5 to 100, in steps of 1 Display setting value to
calculate DF/DT based
on instantaneous df/dt
- ConfirmationNumber 2, 4 Display setting value to
confirm df/dt detection,
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- V>> VALUE 2 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V Displays setting value
if Un range 57-130V for the alarm threshold
or
10 to 960V, in steps of 0.1V
if Un range 220-480V
- tV>> 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- [27] U MIN Heading of [27]
submenu
- V< ? OFF, NU, NU, AND, OR Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for phase
Under Voltage function
- V< VALUE 2 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V Displays setting value
if Un range 57-130V for the alarm threshold
or
10 to 960V, in steps of 0.1V
if Un range 220-480V
- tV< 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- V<< ? OFF, NU, NU, AND, OR Selection of the
second alarm
threshold function for
phase Over Voltage
function
- V<< VALUE 2 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V Displays setting value
if Un range 57-130V for the alarm threshold
or
10 to 960V, in steps of 0.1V
if Un range 220-480V
- tV<< 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- [59N] Residual Over Voltage Heading of [59N]
submenu
- Un> ? OFF, ON Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for Residual
Over Voltage function
- Un> VALUE 1 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V Displays setting value
if Un range 57-130V for the alarm threshold
or
5 to 960V, in steps of 0.1V
if Un range 220-480V
- tUn> 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- [32N] Earth Wattmetric Heading of [32N]
submenu
- Pe> ? OFF, ON Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for Pe>.
C264P/EN ST/C80 Settings
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Pe> Range 57 to 130V Displays setting values
for the alarm threshold
0.2 to 20W
Pe>.
4 to 160W
10 to 800W
Range 220 to 480V
1 to 80W
4 to 640W
40 to 3200W
- Pe> Delay type DMT, STI (CEI), SI (CEI), Displays threshold
VI(CEI), EI (CEI), LTI (CEI), delay time type
STI (CO2), MI (ANSI), LTI
(CO8),VI (ANSI), EI (ANSI),
RECT, RI
- t Pe> 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold.
- TMS 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of Displays TMS value for
0.025 the IDMT curves
-K 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.005 Selection of K value for
the RI curve
- treset 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the reset time for
IEC curves only
- RTMS 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of Displays the RTMS
0.025 value associated with
the IDMT reset time
choice for ANSI & COx
curves only
- Pe> >? No, Yes Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for Pe>>.
- Pe>> Range 57 to 130V Displays setting values
for the alarm threshold
0.2 to 20W
Pe>>.
4 to 160W
10 to 800W
Range 220 to 480V
1 to 80W
4 to 640W
40 to 3200W
- t Pe>> 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold.
- Pe> Pe>> 0° to 359°, in steps of 1°. Displays the setting
angle for Pe. This item
is only activated if at
least one of the Pe
thresholds is enabled.
Settings C264P/EN ST/C80
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- [46]I inv MAX Heading of [46]
submenu
- I2> ? OFF, ON Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for Negative
Phase Sequence OC
(I2>)
- I2> VALUE 0.5 to 25 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In. for the alarm threshold
- I2> Delay type DMT, STI (CEI), SI (CEI), Displays threshold
VI(CEI), EI (CEI), LTI (CEI), delay time type
STI (CO2), MI (ANSI), LTI
(CO8),VI (ANSI), EI (ANSI),
RECT, RI
- tI2> 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- TMS 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of Displays TMS value for
0.025 the IDMT curve
-K 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.005 Selection of K value for
the RI curve
- treset 40 to 100 s, in steps of Displays setting value
10ms for the reset time
- RTMS 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of Displays the RTMS
0.025 value associated with
the IDMT reset time
choice
- I2>> ? OFF, ON Selection of the
second alarm
threshold function for
Negative Phase
Sequence OC (I2>>)
- I2>> VALUE 0.5 to 40 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In. for the alarm threshold
- tI2>> 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
- I2>>> ? OFF, ON Selection of the third
alarm threshold
function for Negative
Phase Sequence OC
(I2>>>)
- I2>>> VALUE 0.5 to 40 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In. for the alarm threshold
- tI2>>> 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms Displays setting value
for the trip threshold
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Thermal OL ? OFF, ON Selection of the first
alarm threshold
function for Thermal
Overload function
- Ith > VALUE 0.1 to 3.2 In, in steps of Displays setting value
0.01 In for the alarm threshold
- Te 1 to 200 min, in steps of Displays the Te
1min thermal constant
associated with the
thermal formula
-K 1 to 1.50, in steps of 0.01 Displays the K factor
associated with the
thermal overload
function
- th Trip 50 to 200%, in steps of Displays the
0.01 percentage applicable
to the thermal overload
trip threshold
- th Alarm OFF, ON Selection of the
thermal overload alarm
function
- th Alarm VALUE 50 to 200%, in steps of Displays the
0.01 percentage applicable
to the thermal overload
alarm threshold
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Cold Load PU Level 100% to 500%, in steps of Displays scaling value,
1%. in percent, for the cold
load pick up assigned
to the selected
thresholds
- Cold Load PU time 0.1 to 360 s, in steps of Displays delay timer
100ms setting (tCL) for the
Cold Load Pick-up
function
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Block I>>> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
I>>> in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO I>>> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
I>>> by a command
- Cold Load PU tI>>>? OFF, ON Assigning the first trip
threshold for phase OC
(tI>>>) to cold load
pick up function
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Cold Load PU tI>>? OFF, ON Assigning the first trip
threshold for phase OC
(tI>>) to cold load pick
up function
- Trip I>>> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
trip the CB on the
instantaneous signal
I>>>
- Block I>>> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
I>>> in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO I>>> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
I>>> by a command
- Cold Load PU tI>>>? OFF, ON Assigning the first trip
threshold for phase OC
(tI>>>) to cold load
pick up function
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Trip f3 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
trip the CB on the
instantaneous signal f3
- Block f3 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal f3
in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO f3 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal f3
by a command
- Trip f4 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
trip the CB on the
instantaneous signal f4
- Block f4 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal f4
in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO f4 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal f4
by a command
- Trip f5 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
trip the CB on the
instantaneous signal f5
- Block f5 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal f5
in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO f5 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal f5
by a command
- Trip f6 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
trip the CB on the
instantaneous signal f6
- Block f6 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal f6
in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO f6 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal f6
by a command
Settings C264P/EN ST/C80
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Block df/dt4 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
df/dt4 in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO df/dt4 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
df/dt4 by a command
- Trip df/dt5 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
trip the CB on the
instantaneous signal
df/dt5
- Block df/dt5 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
df/dt5 in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO df/dt5 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
df/dt5 by a command
- Trip df/dt6 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
trip the CB on the
instantaneous signal
df/dt6
- Block df/dt6 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
df/dt6 in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO df/dt6 OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
df/dt6 by a command
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Block CO V> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
V> by a command
- Trip V>> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
trip the CB on the
instantaneous signal
V>>
- Block V>> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
V>> in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO V>> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
V>> by a command
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Trip UN> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
trip the CB on the
instantaneous signal
UN>
- Block UN> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
UN> in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO UN> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
UN> by a command
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Block I2> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
I2> in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO I2> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
I2> by a command
- Cold Load PU tI2>? OFF, ON Assigning the first trip
threshold for phase OC
(tI2>) to cold load pick
up function
- Trip I2>> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
trip the CB on the
instantaneous signal
I2>>
- Block I2>> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
I2>> in case of circuit
breaker failure
detection
- Block CO I2>> OFF, ON Select the possibility to
block the
instantaneous signal
I2>> by a command
- Cold Load PU tI2>>? OFF, ON Assigning the first trip
threshold for phase OC
(tI2>>) to cold load pick
up function
Available Values
Parameter
MENU TREE Or
signification
[min;max](step)(unit)
- Cold Load PU tIth>? OFF, ON Assigning the first trip
threshold for phase OC
(tIth>) to cold load pick
up function
4. MiCOM S1 (MS1)
It describes the Settings -or on-line- parameters, which can be modified in runtime on
MiCOM C264 computers. Micom S1 application provides the facility to online view and edit
the parameters of C264.
The setting for the C264 parameters will be performed using a file transfer mechanism. The
setting is allowed only if the C264 is in Operational mode. In case of C264 redundancy, the
setting can be performed only on the Active computer (to avoid discrepancy between both
computers parameters, a manual load of settings is to be realised on the backup C264).
PC minimum configuration:
• A CD-ROM drive
• SBus agency
• WinPcap 4
• Antivirus Avira Antivir Professional Version 9.0 or later (that is recommended for
PERMA A2.15 architecture).
Install the CAT software. Go to Program -> Pacis -> Computer ->MicomS1 and click
settings.
At MiCOM S1 launch, the application requests the Microsoft security center to check that the
antivirus is present and up-to-date. If antivirus is not present or not up-to-date, MiCOM S1
can still be launched, but the user is warned that antivirus is not present or outdated.
Go to Program -> Pacis -> Computer -> FTPD and click wftpd32.
• AUTOMAT.CONTROL
• Synchrocheck
• Auto-recloser bay 1
• ….
• Auto-recloser bay N
• ISaGRAF Automatism 1
• …
• ISaGRAF Automatism N
• PSL Automatism 1
• …
• PSL Automatism M
The description of each parameter can be seen in below figure.
Built in functions like ISaGRAF, PSL automatism, AVR and Auto-Recloser are configured in
SCE. Only parameters of configured functions are visible and editable in MiCOM S1.
It is possible to set the following functions:
• Two kinds of parameters in FBD: The timeout used for (Ton / Toff) and the parameter
(Boolean) validation
The file .set can be found in the Settings folder of the database (.zip).
Settings C264P/EN ST/C80
Schneider Electric
The MiCOM S1 application indicates that a file .VAL is available. The “VAL” file is transferred
via FTP. C264 is the FTP client. An FTP server is mandatory on the MiCOM S1 host PC.
MiCOM S1 application transfers “VAL” file to a computer defined by its IP address. Computer
checks the coherency of this file and acknowledges it positively or negatively.
MiCOM S1 uploads values to C264 using the function “Set Settings”
4.2.1 How to send setting files to C264
Connect to the C264 as a System engineer using CAT.
Select a topic in the MS1 explorer.
Select the menu Transmission -> Set Settings.
Choose the type of generation Build values / Build and send values
Schneider Electric
=>
C264P/EN ST/C80 Settings
• Numbers of fast cycle for earth fault min = 0 , max = 1 step = 1 cycle step
• Numbers of slow cycle for earth fault min = 0 , max = 2 , step = 1 cycle step
• Numbers of fast cycle for phase fault min = 0 , max = 1 , step = 1 cycle step
• Numbers of slow cycle for phase fault min = 0, max = 2, step = 1 cycle step
• Reclaim time fast cycle, min = 10000 , max = 15000 , step = 1000
• Reclaim time slow cycle, min = 3000 , max = 10000 , step = 1000
• Reclaim time manual close , min = 10000, max = 20000 , step =1000
• Timer cycle slow1 earth , min = 10000, max = 30000 , step =1000
• Timer cycle slow2 earth , min = 10000, max = 30000 , step =1000
• Timer cycle slow1 phase , min = 10000 , max = 30000 , step =1000
• Timer cycle slow2 phase , min = 10000 , max = 30000 , step =1000
C264P/EN ST/C80 Settings
• 3rd period triphased time min = 1000, max = 3600000, step = 1000
Schneider Electric
The MiCOM S1 application needs to have a .VAL file located in the computer’s flash. The
“VAL” file is transferred via FTP. When data transmission is finished; the C264 sends an
acknowledgement message. This message give permission to read the .VAL received.
MiCOM S1 uses the .VAL file in order to get back and update the .SET values. (Only values
are used by MiCOM S1).
MiCOM S1download values from C264 using the function “Get Settings”
NOTE: A new register key is created for use the settings. Refer to
C264/ENMF.
The following figures show the how to get val file from C264:
Settings C264P/EN ST/C80
MiCOM C264P
COMMUNICATIONS
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2. SCP COMMUNICATION 6
2.1 Communication on Station bus 6
2.1.1 Finality 6
2.1.2 Inputs 6
2.1.3 Supported services 6
2.1.4 Supported data objects 7
3. SCADA COMMUNICATION 8
3.1 Overview 8
3.2 SCADA common functionality 8
3.2.1 Interface to SCADA 8
3.2.2 BCU 8
3.2.3 RTU standalone 9
3.2.4 Behaviour and specific treatments 10
3.2.5 Data sent to SCADA 12
3.2.6 Data sent to MiCOM C264 13
3.3 Slave DNP3 profile (serial or over IP) 14
3.4 Slave IEC 60870-5-101 profile 23
3.4.1 System or device 23
3.4.2 Network configuration 23
3.4.3 Physical layer 24
3.4.4 Link layer 24
3.4.5 Application layer 25
3.4.6 Basic application functions 29
3.4.7 Protocol Requirements 33
3.4.8 Application Functions 33
3.5 Slave IEC 60870-5-104 Server profile 36
3.5.1 System or device 36
3.5.2 Network configuration (Network-specific parameter) 36
3.5.3 Physical layer (Network-specific parameter) 37
3.5.4 Link layer (Network specific parameter) 37
3.5.5 Protocol Requirements 38
3.5.6 Application layer 38
3.5.7 Basic application functions 44
3.6 Slave Modbus (MODICON) profile 48
3.6.1 Introducing MODBUS 48
3.6.2 Slave responses 49
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
BLANK PAGE
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
2. SCP COMMUNICATION
2.1 Communication on Station bus
2.1.1 Finality
This item describes IEC61850-8-1 implementation inside MiCOM C264.
2.1.2 Inputs
2.1.2.1 Information: MiCOM C264 application SCP
The type of information that can be transmitted are:
• Counters
• Controls
• Control acknowledgements
• MiCOM C264 information (Init. report, Operating mode, control mode, Date)
2.1.2.2 Information SCP MiCOM C264 application
The type of information that can be transmitted are:
• Counters
• Controls
• Control acknowledgements
• Database downloading
2.1.3 Supported services
Services supported by the IEC61850 agency integrated in the MiCOM C264 are listed in the
ACSI service conformance statement defined in Table A.3 of document
MiCOM C264/C264P PICS.
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
Client Server
Common Class Comment
support support
Status
SPS Single input status YES YES
DPS Double input status YES YES
INS Integer input status YES YES
ACT Protection activation information YES YES
ACD Directional protection activation YES YES
information
Measurements
MV Measurement value YES YES
CMV Complex measurement value YES YES
WYE 3 phase + N measurement YES YES
DELTA Phase to phase measurement YES YES
Counters
BCR Binary counter YES YES
Control
SPC Single point control YES YES
DPC Double control output YES YES
BSC Binary step control YES YES
APC Analogue output YES YES
INC Integer control output YES YES
ISC Integer step control output YES YES
Description
LPL Logical node name plate YES YES
DPL Device name plate YES YES
Report Control Block
URCB Unbuffered report control block YES YES
BRCB Buffered report control block NO YES
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
3. SCADA COMMUNICATION
3.1 Overview
• Four (4) different SCADA protocols can run simultaneously. Four (4) on Ethernet and
two (2) on Serial. Each protocol has an independant configuration and may have
same data.
• In T104 protocol, from the SCADA side, up to four (4) ports can be defined,
corresponding to one active port and three backup ports. IP addresses are configured
for each T104 client. Each T104 protocol can manage up to four (4) clients
simultaneously.
• In DNP3 over IP protocol is supported over two (2) Ethernet ports. Each DNP3
protocol can manage one (1) client only. All DNP3 on IP features are the same than
DNP3 serial features.
Redundancy (C264 only):
• The C264 RTU standalone redundancy (link and protocol) is supported by T101
protocol only. So the redundancy is not available for other protocols (DNP3,
MODBUS, T104, HNZ) and all protocols with the C264 BCU.
Common features to all SCADA communication and all protocols are specified below.
Specific features to each protocol are specified in subsequent paragraphs.
3.2 SCADA common functionality
3.2.1 Interface to SCADA
This paragraph describes the exchange of data between the “SCADA communication”
function and the Master SCADA. It includes two sub-paragraphs:
3.2.2.2 Output
NOTE: The “Reboot Computer” function is restricted and only accessible after
the “database download”.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
3.2.3.2 Output
• At a given time, only one SCADA can send controls to the substation (the one which
has the control).
− Reset the “Taking Control Binary input” of the SCADA which had previously the
control
− Set the “Taking Control Binary input” of the SCADA which asks the control
If the take control command is set for a SCADA, MiCOM C264 should refuse all commands
from other SCADAs.
3.2.4.7 SBMC mode
This mode is used to test a substation while it is in Remote mode. As this mode is a test
mode, MiCOM C264 won’t send all changes of state to SCADA.
When bay turns to SBMC mode, MiCOM C264 will send to SCADA all concerned data
(configured Bay Based in the SCE) at specific states defined in the SCE for the management
of SBMC.
For those data, change of state won’t be transmitted, but will be memorised by MiCOM C264
while the Bay is in SBMC mode.
When the Bay returns to Non SBMC mode, MiCOM C264 will send the current state of any
data that has changed whilst the Bay has been in SBMC mode.
3.2.4.8 Redundancy
Serial links can be configured as redundant. In this case, SCADA can send requests on both
serial links: “main link “or “redundant link”.
MiCOM C264 always responds on the link used by SCADA for requesting the slave
3.2.4.9 Automatic synchrocheck
SCADA can send control to synchronised circuit breakers with a facility to bypass the
synchrocheck.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
− The percentage of filling from which the MiCOM C264 will try to transmit the SOE
file
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
• When the SOE is full, the oldest Event is deleted and the new one is added
• Once a SOE file has been successfully up-loaded, all Event sent are deleted from
SOE
3.2.5.7 Synchronisation status
MiCOM C264 can inform the controlling station about its synchronisation status.
According to the protocol, this may be done by a specific message or by a binary input.
3.2.6 Data sent to MiCOM C264
SCADA can send data to MiCOM C264. The type of data is described in subsequent
paragraphs.
3.2.6.1 Digital Controls or setpoints
A control is transmitted to the handling of control sequences function.
At the end of the control sequence an acknowledgement is sent to SCADA if protocol allows
it.
3.2.6.2 Counter commands
The commands allowed on counters are:
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events
Specific variation requested: When no specific variation requested:
Never Never
Only time-tagged Binary Input Change With Time
Only non-time-tagged Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable to send both, one or the other Configurable (attach explanation)
(explanation below)
User option to have all Binary Input
Change Events returned as either:
• time-tagged OR
• non-time-tagged
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Codes Qual Codes (2) Func Codes Qual Codes
Obj Var Description
(dec) (hex) (dec) (hex)
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Codes Qual Codes (2) Func Codes Qual Codes
Obj Var Description
(dec) (hex) (dec) (hex)
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Codes Qual Codes (2) Func Codes Qual Codes
Obj Var Description
(dec) (hex) (dec) (hex)
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Codes Qual Codes (2) Func Codes Qual Codes
Obj Var Description
(dec) (hex) (dec) (hex)
SPS:
Reserved BS1[6]
RestartBS1[1]
State BS1[7]
SBMC is Off
BS1[3]
RESET 1 - - - - - - 0
SET 1 - - - - - - 1
TOGGLING 1 - - - - 1 - 0
SELFCHECKFAULT 0 - - - - - - 0
UNKNOWN 1 - 1 - - - - (1)
SUPPRESSED 1 - - 1 - - - (2)
FORCED 1 - - 1 - - - (2)
SUBSTITUTED 1 - - 1 - - - (2)
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
DPS:
DNP3 binary input status object DNP3 binary input status object
Comm.lost BS1[2]
Comm.lost BS1[2]
Reserved BS1[6]
Reserved BS1[6]
Remote Forced
Remote Forced
On-line BS1[0]
On-line BS1[0]
SCE Inversion = No
RestartBS1[1]
RestartBS1[1]
State BS1[7]
State BS1[7]
SBMC is Off
BS1[3]
BS1[3]
OPEN 1 - - - - - - 1 1 - - - - - - 0
CLOSED 1 - 0 1 - - - - - - 1
JAMMED 0 - 0 0 - 1
UNDEFINED 0 - - - 0 0 - 1
TOGGLING 1 - - - - 1 - 0 1 - - - - 1 - 1
SELFCHECKFAULT 0 - - - - - - 0 0 - - - - - - 1
UNKNOWN 1 - 1 - - - - (1) 1 - 1 - - - - (1)
SUPPRESSED 1 - - 1 - - - (2) 1 - - 1 - - - (2)
FORCED 1 - - 1 - - - (2) 1 - - 1 - - - (2)
SUBSTITUTED 1 - - 1 - - - (2) 1 - - 1 - - - (2)
(1) If information comes from IEC61850 then BS1[7] is as transmitted on 61850.If the c264
detects a disconnection of a IEC61850 server then Information of this server are reset.
If information comes from a VDEW IED or a MODBUS IED there is no change from the
previous status. If information comes from a T101 IED or DNP3 IED, the bit is reset.
(2) Value is given by the client that forces, suppresses or substitutes the information.
“-“ stands for 0 except when 0 is significant, in this case the 0 appears in the cell.
“X stands for No change. It means no change from the previous status.
The table below described the management of the DNP3 Object coding status Flag and
current value for each PACiS MV and SPI status. This management is the same whether the
information is with or without time tag. The SBMC is off.
Status
Over-range BS1[5]
Comm.lost BS1[2]
Reserved BS1[7]
SBMC is Off
RestartBS1[1]
VALID 1 - - - - - - - VALUE*
SELFCHECK FAULT 0 - - - - - - - X*
UNKNOWN 1 - 1 - - - - - X*
FORCED 1 - - 1 - - - - VALUE*
SUPPRESSED 1 - - 1 - - - - VALUE*
SUBSTITUTED 1 - - 1 - - - - VALUE*
OVERRANGE 0 - - - - - - - Min or Max or (1)*
(0x6000)
UNDEFINED 0 - - - - - - - X*
OPENCIRCUIT 0 - - - - - - - X*
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
*value can be scaled and depends to the format (Natural or Adjusted). If the result of the
scaling is not between min and max defined in the configuration, then the MV is
OVERRANGE
(1) If the scaling value is between min and max then this value is transmitted
The table below described the management of the DNP3 Object coding status Flag and
delta value for each PACiS COUNTER status. This management os the same whether the
information is with or without time tag. The SBMC is off.
Over-range BS1[5]
Comm.lost BS1[2]
PACiS Counter Status
Reserved BS1[7]
DNP3 object coding
On-line BS1[0]
RestartBS1[1]
status Value
VALID 1 - - - - - - - VALUE
SELFCHECK FAULT 0 - - - - - - - X
UNKNOWN 1 - 1 - - - - - X
OVERRANGE 0 - - - - - - - X
UNDEFINED 0 - - - - - - - X
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
System definition
Unbalanced interchange
CIRCUIT V24/V28 Balanced interchange
Recommended if Circuit X24/X27
Standard
> 1200 bits/s
100 bits/s ⌧ 2400 bits/s ⌧ 2400 bits/s 56000 bits/s
200 bits/s ⌧ 4800 bits/s ⌧ 4800 bits/s 64000 bits/s
⌧ 300 bits/s ⌧ 9600 bits/s ⌧ 9600 bits/s
Unbalanced interchange
Circuit V24/V28 Balanced interchange
Recommended if Circuit X24/X27
Standard
> 1200 bits/s
100 bits/s ⌧ 2400 bits/s ⌧ 2400 bits/s 56000 bits/s
⌧ Two octets
Structured
⌧ Unstructured
⌧ Three octets
Cause of transmission
(system-specific parameter, all configurations that are used are to be marked ‘X’)
⌧ <14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
⌧ <18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1
⌧ <19> := Packed output circuit transmission of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
⌧ <36> := Measured value, short floating point number with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TF_1
⌧ <39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1
⌧ <40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1
File transfer
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ <122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
<3> M_DP_NA_1 X X X X
<4> M_DP_TA_1 X X
<5> M_ST_NA_1 X X X X
<6> M_ST_TA_1 X X
<7> M_BO_NA_1
<8> M_BO_TA_1
<9> M_ME_NA_1 X X X X
<10> M_ME_TA_1 X
<11> M_ME_NB_1 X X X X
<12> M_ME_TB_1 X
<13> M_ME_NC_1 X X X X
<14> M_ME_TC_1 X
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X X
<16> M_IT_TA_1 X X
<17> M_EP_TA_1
<18> M_EP_TB_1 X
<19> M_EP_TC_1 X
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1
<30> M_SP_TB_1 X X X
<31> M_DP_TB_1 X X X
<32> M_ST_TB_1 X X X
<33> M_BO_TB_1
<34> M_ME_TD_1 X
<35> M_ME_TE_1 X
<36> M_ME_TF_1 X
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X X
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1 X
<40> M_EP_TF_1 X
<45> C_SC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
<111> P_ME_NB_1 X
<112> P_ME_NC_1 X
<113> P_AC_NA_1 X
<120> F_FR_NA_1 X X X X
<121> F_SR_NA_1 X X X X
<122> F_SC_NA_1 X X X X
<123> F_LS_NA_1 X X X X
<124> F_AF_NA_1 X X X X
<125> F_SG_NA_1 X X X X
<126> F_DR_TA_1 X X
<136> M_DB_NA_1 X
<137> C_RC_NB_1 X X X X X X X X
Remote initialisation
Read procedure
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
Read procedure
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
Spontaneous transmission
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ Spontaneous transmission
General interrogation
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ global
⌧ group 6 ⌧ group 12
⌧ global
⌧ group 4
Clock synchronisation
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ Clock synchronisation
NOTES: - The controlled station does not report the change of hour by
sending a clock synchronisation message (ASDU 103) to the
controlling station.
- When the controlling station send to controlled station a clock
synchronisation and if the system (includes controlled station), isn’t
synchronized by an other source : the clock synchronisation
response is positive.
- When the controlling station send to controlled station a clock
synchronisation and if the system (includes controlled station), is
synchronized by an other source : the clock synchronisation
response is negative.
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
Command transmission
(object -specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ No additional definition
Persistent output
Parameter loading
(object-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
Threshold value
Smoothing factor
Parameter activation
(object-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
Test procedure
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ Test procedure
File transfer
(station-specific parameter), mark ‘X’ if function is used)
File transfert in monitor direction
⌧ Transparent file
Transparent file
Background scan
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ Background scan
Class 2 data
The following types of information must be configured at the controlled station to be Class 2 :
Command transmission
All control commands shall be Select before Execute, or Direct Execute.
For only the control commands: Activation termination is returned to the controlling station to
signal the end of a control sequence.
The QU field of the Qualifier of Command shall be set to zero (0), no additional definition.
Test procedure
A test command may be issued by the controlling station to ensure the availability of the
communications link and the commands subsystem.
Test commands are received at the controlled station on the active link. The controlled
station mirrors the test command, on the link from which it was received, with a cause of
transmission indicating activation confirmation.
An error response should be sent if the command is incorrect, with a cause of transmission
indicating negative activation confirmation.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
Structured
Unstructured
Frame length
_255_ Maximum length L (number of bytes)
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ASDU types are returned in class 2
messages (low priority) with the indicated causes of transmission:
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
3.5.5.2 Static
The following types of information are to be configured at the controlled station to be Static:
● Three octets
Cause of transmission
(System-specific parameter)
Length of APDU
(System-specific parameter)
The maximum length of APDU is 253 (default). The maximum length may be reduced by the
system.
● <36>: = Measured value, short floating point value, time tag CP56Time2a M-ME-TF-1
● <61>: = Set point command normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TA_1
● <62>: = Set point command scaled value with time tag C_SE_TB_1
CP56Time2a
● <63>: = Set point command short floating point value with time tag C_SE_TC_1
CP56Time2a
<64>: = Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a C_BO_TA_1
File transfer
(station specific parameter)
● <122>: = Call directory, select file, call file, call section F-SC-NA-1
<1> M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X
<2> M_SP_TA_1
<3> M_DP_NA_1 X X X X X
<4> M_DP_TA_1 .
<5> M_ST_NA_1 X X X X X
<6> M_ST_TA_1 .
<7> M_BO_NA_1
<8> M_BO_TA_1
<9> M_ME_NA_1 X X X X
<10> M_ME_TA_1
<11> M_ME_NB_1 X X X X
<12> M_ME_TB_1
<13> M_ME_NC_1 X X X X
<14> M_ME_TC_1
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X X
<16> M_IT_TA_1
<17> M_EP_TA_1
<18> M_EP_TB_1
<19> M_EP_TC_1
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1
<30> M_SP_TB_1 X X X
<31> M_DP_TB_1 X X X
<32> M_ST_TB_1 X X X
<33> M_BO_TB_1
<34> M_ME_TD_1 X
<35> M_ME_TE_1 X
<36> M_ME_TF_1 X
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X X
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1 X
<40> M_EP_TF_1 X
<45> C_SC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X
<46> C_DC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X
<47> C_RC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X
<48> C_SE_NA_1 X X X X X X X X
<49> C_SE_NB_1 X X X X X X X X
<50> C_SE_NC_1 X X X X X X X X
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
<51> C_BO_NA_1
<58> C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X X X X
<59> C_DC_TA_1 X X X X X X X X
<60> C_RC_TA_1 X X X X X X X X
<61> C_SE_TA_1 X X X X X X X X
<62> C_SE_TB_1 X X X X X X X X
<63> C_SE_TC_1 X X X X X X X X
<64> C_BO_TA_1
<70> M_EI_NA_1 X
<100> C_IC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X
<101> C_CI_NA_1 X X X X X X
<102> C_RD_NA_1
<103> C_CS_NA_1 X X X X X
<104> C_TS_NA_1
<105> C_RP_NA_1
<106> C_CD_NA_1
<107> C_TS_TA_1 X X X
<110> P_ME_NA_1
<111> P_ME_NB_1
<112> P_ME_NC_1
<113> P_AC_NA_1
<120> F_FR_NA_1 X X
<121> F_SR_NA_1 X X
<122> F_SC_NA_1 X X X
<123> F_LS_NA_1 X X
<124> F_AF_NA_1 X X
<125> F_SG_NA_1 X X
<126> F_DR_TA_1 X X
<136> M_DB_NA_1
<137> C_RC_NB_1 X X X X X X X X
<138> C_RC_TB_1 X X X X X X X X
Remote initialisation
Read procedure
Spontaneous transmission
(Station-specific parameter)
● Spontaneous transmission
General interrogation
(System or station-specific parameter)
● Global
● Group 5 ● Group 11
● Global
● Group 1 ● Group 3
● Group 2 ● Group 4
Clock synchronisation
(Station specific parameter)
● Clock synchronisation
Command transmission
(Object specific parameter)
● Direct set point command transmission ● Select and execute set point
command
● C-SE ACTTERM used
● No additional definition
Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Persistent output
Parameter loading
(Object-specific parameter)
Threshold value
Smoothing factor
Low limit for transmission of measured value
High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter activation
(Object-specific parameter)
Test procedure
(Station-specific parameter)
● Test procedure
File transfer
(Station-specific parameter)
File transfer in monitor direction
● Transparent file
Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
● Transmission of sequences of events
Transmission of sequences of recorded analogue values
Transparent file
Background scan
(Station-specific parameter)
● Background scan
● Ethernet 802.3
Serial X.21 interface
Other selection from RFC 2200
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
• If the slave device receives the query without communication error, and can handle
the query normally, it returns a normal response.
• If the slave does not receive the query due to a communication error, no response is
returned. The master program will process a timeout condition for query.
• If the slave receives the query, but detect a communication error [ bad CRC or framing
error for example ], no response is returned. The master program will process a
timeout condition for query.
• If the slave device receives the query without communication error, but cannot handle
it, the salve will return an exception response informing the master of the nature of the
error.
3.6.2.2 Exception Responses Codes
The exception code is sent as an 8-bit data, the range of valid codes is 1-8 in the protocol.
Supported exception responses codes are :
17 REPORT SLAVE ID NO
18 PROGRAM 884/M84 NO
19 RESET COMM. LINK NO
20 READ GENERAL REFERENCE NO
21 WRITE GENERAL REFERENCE NO
22 MASK WRITE 4X REGISTER NO
23 READ/WRITE 4X REGISTERS NO
24 READ FIFO QUEUE NO
Response :
Slave Function Byte Count Data Byte Data Byte Data Byte CRC CRC
Address Code = <nbytes> #1 #i #nbytes
(L) (H)
= 01
The coil or status in the response message is packed as one coil per bit of the data field.
Digital inputs can be single (coded on one bit) or double (in this case 1 or 2 bits defined in
configuration).
For Single DI or Double DI coded on one bit, status is indicated as: 1 = ON, 0 = OFF.
For double DI coded on two bits, status indicates: [open contact, closed contact] = [0,1] for
open, [1,0] for closed, [0,0] for jammed], [0,1] for the other states
The less significant bit of the first data byte contains the coil addressed in the query. The
other coils follow toward the high order end of this byte, and from 'low order to high order' in
subsequent bytes, as described in the frame example.
Important notes :
1. If the returned coil quantity is not a multiple of eight, the remaining bits in the final byte
will be padded with zeros (toward the high order end of the byte). The Byte Count
Field specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data.
For easiest understanding between the gateway and the SCADA, it is recommended
to read a number of points which is a multiple of 8.
2. If the starting address is not a point in configuration, the message will be not be
accepted, and an error exception 2 will be returned.
3. If the starting address is in configuration and if there is some “holes” (addresses not in
configuration) theses holes will be padded with 0 (i.e value OFF).
3.6.6 Function 03 / 04: Read Holding Registers / Input Registers
The request function 03 or 04 reads the values of analogue inputs, tap position and counters
values in the slave.
In case of tap position and counters values, only natural coding is supported.
These two functions are the only way to read registers points with the MODBUS protocol.
Flags (validity, topical, ..) are not supported in the MODBUS protocol base.
This is equal using the Read Holding Registers request or the Read Input Registers request.
Broadcast is not supported.
Addresses in frames may start from 0…65535.
Query :
Slave Function Byte Data Data Data Data Data Data CRC CRC
address code Count
(H) (L) (H) (L) (H) (L) (L) (H)
=
= 03 #1 #1 #i #i #nbytes/ 2 #nbytes/
<nbytes>
2
The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per register, with the
binary contents right justified within each byte. For each register, the first byte contains the
high order bits and the second contains the low order bits.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
Important notes :
1. If the starting address is not a point in configuration, the message will be not be
accepted, and an error exception 2 will be returned.
2. If the starting address is in configuration and if there is some “holes” (addresses not in
configuration) theses holes will be padded with the value 0
3.6.6.1 Signed normalised coding
The signed normalised coding is used to encode the 16 bits-registers. Analogue maximal
value will be coded 7FFFh (decimal value + 32767), and minimal value will be coded 8000h
(decimal value –32768).
For this mode, the gateway may now code the value on 8 to 16 bits [ low part of the register
will be used ]. But, 16 bits is normally the standard to use the full scale conversion.
Example :
in configuration the maximal value for an analogue point is +3000 and minimum value for
this analogue is 0.
That means that when the analogue is received with value 0 from the system, the gateway
will send to the SCADA the register with 8000h value. If this analogue is equal to the
maximal value +3000, the value sent to the SCADA is 7FFFh. Calculation is linear for the
coding between the min and max values.
3.6.6.2 Unsigned normalised coding
The unsigned normalised coding is used to encode the 16 bits-registers. Analogue maximal
value will be coded FFFFh (decimal value + 65535), and minimal value will be coded 0000h
(decimal value 0).
For this mode, the gateway may now code the value on 8 to 16 bits [ low part of the register
will be used ]. But, 16 bits is normally the standard to use the full scale conversion.
Example :
in configuration the maximal value for an analogue point is +3000 and minimum value for
this analogue is 0.
That means that when the analogue is received with value 0 from the system, the gateway
will send to the SCADA the register with 0h value. If this analogue is equal to the maximal
value +3000, the value sent to the SCADA is FFFFh. Calculation is linear for the coding
between the min and max values.
3.6.6.3 Natural coding
The natural coding is used to encode data without any calculation. That’s means that integer
value will be send.
Example :
if the gateway receives the value 10.xxxx, the value 0Ah will be set in the appropriate
register. The gateway receives the value –10,xxxx the value FFF6h will be coded. Sent
values are considered as signed values which are included between –32768 and +32767.
When minimum and maximum values are reached values FFF6h and FFFFh are
respectively sent.
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
Slave Function Code Sub Function Sub Function Data Data CRC CRC
Address code code
= 08 (H) (L) (L) (H)
(H) (L)
The query message specifies the data that will be echoed.
Response :
Slave Function Code Sub Function Sub Function Echoed Echoed CRC CRC
Address code code
= 08 Data Data (L) (H)
(H) (L)
(H) (L)
The normal response is an echo of the query with the same data send in the request.
NOTE : If the sub-function is different from 0, an exception error “illegal
function” is returned.
3.6.10 Function 15 : Force Multiple Coils
Normally, this request function 15 is used to realise a control on several contiguous
addresses.
This function can be used, but only one control can be send at the same time.
NOTE : Only a count number equal to 1 is allowed, otherwise an exception
error 3 will be replied.
3.6.11 Function 16 : Preset multiple registers
Normally, this request function 16 is used to preset on several contiguous addresses.
This function can be used, but only one preset can be send at the same time.
NOTE : Only a count number equal to 1 is allowed, otherwise an exception
error 3 will be replied.
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
• The adaptations brought to the software of the RTU C264 to include transmission HNZ
“Yemen” allowing to connect the RTU C264 to Centre SCC “SANA’A” as a Master-
Slave mode via a Concentrator (FEC)
3.7.2.1.2 Messages
Message treated in the Concentrating direction (Centre) towards RTU:
3.7.2.5.2 Resolution
The RM of the RTU are received by the Protocol on float 32 bits for the ARM and integer 32
bits for the DRM. The protocol applies a conversion of the computed value to acquired value
on signed integer 16 bits. An adaptation for the transmission is done by extension of the sign
for the values acquired on 12 bits and by truncation of the lower bits for the values acquired
on 16 bits.
Truncation is done with round up/down the approximate value.
When a RM is invalid, the bit of invalidity and the bit of sign are positioned to «1», the
transmitted value is fixed at $7FF.
3.7.2.5.3 Frequency of acquisition and transmission
RM can be transmitted periodically towards the higher level, each RM can be affected in
database to a cycle among four possible.
As the message of cyclic transmission of RM contents two contiguous entities, a certain
constraint on the level of the choice of the cycle, number and addresses of transmission will
be necessary to apply at the time of the realization of the database.
At the time of a request for RS Overall Check, the RTU C264 will return towards the centre
the whole of RM having an address of transmission, in the form of RM message cyclic, that
these ones are declared cyclic or not in database. This choice is necessary for the update of
RM, at level of the centre, following the sending of a message «loss information» .
3.7.2.5.4 Messages
RM are transmitted « periodically or on variation » to the Control Centre
The messages treated in the direction Concentrator (Control Centre ) towards RTU are:
• Not message
In direction RTU towards Concentrator (Control Centre ), we have:
3.7.3.2 Setpoints
3.7.3.2.1 Addressing in transmission
The SP can be classified in two types:
• Analogue SP
• Digital SP
There is no specific zone of addressing for the two types of SP.
These dispositions will have to be respected by the operator having charges the typing of the
databases of C264 “YEMEN. ”
By analogy with the RTU S80 and for reasons of identification of the frames, the field of
addressing in transmission of a Set Point is represented by an address contained on 5 bits in
a byte.
The maximun number of SP is 32.
3.7.3.2.2 Catch of activity
The concept of catch of activity by the centre does not exist in the transmission S80 YEMEN.
To get around it, S900 generates an internal catch of activity automatically when it receives a
message of Set Point.
3.7.3.2.3 Bay / Substation Dependence
The concept of bay and substation does not appear in the specification for S80 YEMEN. In
C264 it is possible to decide SP by SP if they are dependent or not on the bay and the
substation.
When the substation or the bay is local mode, the dependent Set Points, sent from the
centre, are refused.
3.7.3.2.4 Messages
The messages treated in the direction Concentrator (Control Centre) towards RTU are:
3.7.4.2 Modulo
The RTU C264 does not send periodically a change of modulo 10 mn.
The modulo 10mn is sent before a change of state if this is not in same that the last
transmitted modulo 10mn
3.7.4.3 Messages
The messages treated in the direction Concentrator (Control Centre) towards RTU are used
to date the RS, the messages of changes of state RS are dated with only the number of
10ms top inside the last transmitted modulo.
The messages treated in the direction Concentrator (Control Centre) towards RTU are:
• direction Centre (FEC) towards RTU bit positioned to «1» at the time of sending of
message of the type SARM, RR, RES, or of applicative information. In the other cases
it is to «0 ».
• direction RTU towards Centre (FEC) positioned bit with «1» at the time of sending
of the message of the type UA. In all the other cases it is to «0».
Bits 2 to 7 contain the address of the RTU in transmission limited from 0 to 63.
3.7.5.3 Length of frame
The length of the frame is variable because it is possible to make concatenation of
information.
The number of characters of the frame is calculated on totality of the frame from the field
«address» to the field «checksum». Its value should not exceed 40 characters .
3.7.5.4 Field «control » in the frame.
This field is in conformity with the standard HNZ (HNZ 66-S-15) except in the use of «the bit
P/F» which in the two directions of transmission is to «0» except when there is a repetition.
3.7.5.5 Byte of checksum
This field is in conformity with the standard HNZ (HNZ 66-S-15).
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
NOTE: CTS wired and CD wired are forced if “delimitation of the frames” is
Data Carrier Detect in two directions
3.7.5.8 Dimensioning
A pool of buffers is reserved for the system of transmission. The number of buffers available
is sufficient to ensure the management of all queues of the system.
Queues for sending can store 200 changes of RS before saturation, the dimensioning of
these queues is carried out dynamically, at the time of the initialization of the RTU, according
to the maximal length of frames defined in the database.
3.7.5.9 Concatenation of the messages
If the parameter «concatened message» defined in database in the level of «information
networks: station» was validated, the transmitted messages can be grouped until not to
exceed the maximum length of the frame.
3.7.5.10 Characteristics of the messages of information
By analogy with RTU ECP80, when the Centre or the Concentrator FEC sends frames of the
«Information type » , there is no response from the RTU C264 (neither ES nor RR).
The dialogue resumes only following one request for end of session «RES» which the RTU
answers end of session «ES». That seems to be related to the judicious choice of the values
of temporization defined to the FEC.
In addition the RTU never sends message of the type « RR» but always «ES». The
acknowledgements of the received frame from the FEC are done only on sending of frame of
information.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
7 0
Transmission Address 1 1 Field Address
RTU
Frame I I: Information NR P NS 0
DM: connection 0 0 0 F 1 1 1 1
Unnumbered
frames SNRM: connection 1 0 0 P 0 0 1 1
DISC: disconnection 0 1 0 P 0 0 1 1
UA: Unnumbered 0 1 1 F 0 0 1 1
Acknowledgement
RES: Request to end of 1 0 0 P 0 1 1 1
session
ES: End of session 0 1 0 P 0 1 1 1
CMDR: refusal of 0 0 1 F 1 1 1 1
command
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
3.7.6.2 Protocol
The protocol is of the type Master–Slave. The centre is a Master of the connection, the RTU
makes only answer the interrogations of the Centre. If the Centre stops the polling of the
RTU, no alarm is generated. Only the loss of information could be sent in the form of an
indication of defect, with the resume of the polling and if the internal file of events is
saturated.
Transmission HNZ YEMEN is not designed to function in doubled lines.
3.7.7 Detailled list of messages of application
3.7.7.1 RQ-RS-OC: Request for RS Overall Check - origin: Centre
7 0
Function code FC : $ 13
The value T=0 relates to all the other requests other than for the RTU
7 0
Function code FC : $ 16
7 0
Function code FC : $ 0B
When a change of hour appends on C264, all information are flushed from the Chronology
fifo and are sent with the bit HV set to 1 (invalid hour possible)
If an information is received with a timestamp newer than the current time plus the depth of
the Chronology fifo, the bit HV is set to 1 to prevent the SCADA that this information did not
be inserted in the Chronology fifo because it is too newer
If an information is received with a timestamp older than the current time minus the depth of
the Chronology fifo, the bit C is set to 1 to prevent the SCADA that this information did not be
inserted in the Chronology fifo because it is too older
The bits HV,C and Sy are transmitted without treatment by the FEC to the SCADA
7 0
Function code FC : $ 02
7 0
Function code FC : $ 05
7 0
Function code FC : $ 19
7 0
Function code FC : $ 09
7 0
FC : $ 1A
Function code
7 0
Function code FC : $ 0A
7 0
Function code FC : $ 1C
7 0
Function code FC : $ 7F
NU NU : Not used
(high byte)
HS : Modulus of time of start
modulus modulus
=> Value : $0…….$EA5F
(low byte)
or 60000 tops 10 mS
HS
null byte => Value : 0
nul byte
M10M Modulus 10 minutes
=> Value : $0 …… $8F
M10M or 144 moduli day
(high byte)
TCT : time compensation
TCT Time compensation in transmission
in transmission
(low byte) => Value : $0…….$FFFF
or 65536 tops 10 ms
C0377ENa
NOTE: Attention for the messages related to the hour the high byte are in the
first place.
The time compensation in transmission corresponds to the delta of time that puts to forward
a message between the Concentrator (Control Centre) and the RTU S900 or reciprocally.
This compensation is calculated by the Concentrator (Control Centre) following an exchange
«RQ-SET-HOUR» and «RE-SET-HOUR» following calculation below:
TCT = [ (HR - HS) –(TTRTU) ] / 2
TCT: Time compensation in transmission
HR: Hour of reception of the message of answer RE-SET-HOUR
HS: Hour of emission of the message of request RQ-SET-HOUR
TTRTU: Time of transit to the RTU (see following paragraph )
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
7 0
Function code FC : $ 7E
NU NU : Not used
(high byte)
HS : Modulus of time of start
modulus modulus
=> Value : $0…….$EA5F
(low byte)
or 60000 tops 10 mS
HS null byte => Value : 0
null byte
M10M Modulus 10 minutes
=> Value : $0 …… $8F
M10M
or 144 moduluss day
(high byte)
TCT : time compensation
TCT Time compensation in transmission
in transmission
(low byte) => Value : $0…….$FFFF
or 65536 tops 10 ms
(high byte)
TTRTU Time of Transit in RTU TTRTU : Time of transit in RTU
=> Value : $0…….$FFFF
(low byte) or 65536 tops 10 ms
C0378ENa
The time of transit to RTU (TTRTU) corresponds to the delta of time between the reception
of the message of request RQ-SET-HOUR and the emission of its answer RE-RE-HOUR.
7 0
Function code FC : $ 0F
RTU
CENTRE
SARM
SARM
UA
SARM
Connection HNZ
UA
ES
ROS
RR Acknowledgement
ES End of session
C0380ENa
The sequence of connection of the protocol is represented above followed with a change of
state RS .
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
CENTRE RTU
ROS
Start and end of session without
ES information
ROS
Start and end of session with
RQ-SET-DATE setting of the date
ES
Waiting for repetition time-delay
or end of session
RES
ES Request and end of session
ROS
Open of session with setting of
RQ-SET-TIME time to calculate the
ES compensation
ROS
RQ-SET-TIME Start of session with response
of setting time
RR Acknowledgement and end of
Session
ES
ROS
RQ-SET-TIME
Identical sequence for setting
time with compensated time
RR
ES
ROS
ES
C0381ENa
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
CENTRE RTU
ROS
Start of session with request of
RQ-RS-OC overall check
ES
ROS
RS-OC
RR
RS-OC Responses to overall check
RR
RS-OC
ROS
CY-RM
RR Send cyclic RM
CY-RM
ROS
ES Interrogation at start of session
ROS
ROS
RM-CV Send of change of value of RM
C0382ENa
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
Origin: Centre
3.7.10 Configuration
Refer to chapter AP
3.7.11 Cable
A specific cable must be used for HNZ Yemen Protocol:
101 1 1 101
102 7 5 5 7 102
103 2 3 2 3 104
104 3 2 3 2 103
109 8 1 7 4 105
8 5 106
105 4 7 1 8 109
106 5 8
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
When invalid SRSs are embedded in GC responses, the following scheme is implemented:
If a SRS byte contains an invalid RS when constructing the SRS GC message (fc 16 h), the
construction process stops, and the message, without the byte, is buffered in the transmit
queue. An INV SRS GC message (17 h) is then constructed and issued. It contains all
invalid SRSs found in the GC block sent by the application program to the code conversion
layer. Normal SRS GC transmission resumes after this byte.
Also, as SRS and DRS addresses are clearly separated in BD, SRS and DRS states are
contained in different messages.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
Address 03
When one or more DOU couplers fail, the RC function continues with the couplers that
remain valid.
When one or more AIU couplers fail, the RM function continues with the couplers that
remain valid.
When one or more DIU couplers fail, the RS function continues with the couplers that
remain valid.
When one or more AOU couplers fail, the SP function continues with the couplers that
remain valid.
3.8.1.2.1.4 Database Constraints
3.8.1.2.1.4.1 External RSs
To meet EPC 3200 requirements, DRSs must be specified in reverse state in the RTU
database.
3.8.1.2.1.4.2 Internal RSs
ISs sent to ELENAS derive from the C264 fault. The corresponding fault conditions must be
made transferable.
Note: ISs are automatically created in the ELENAS database and labeled identically to those
of the EPC 3200 RTUs. You must always observe this consistency when generating the
database of the C264 RTU.
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
The operating mode of individual RMs(fc 01 h) is determined by the value of the op-mode
byte:
Upon RTU reset, the transmission of all RMs is disabled until the end-of-RM-GC message is
issued.
Mode 0 of EPC 3200 is made functional by marking the relevant RMs as cyclical in the
RTU’s DB.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
3.8.1.2.2.4 RM Snapshot
The function is not supported in S900 so it ‘s also not supported in C264.
3.8.1.2.2.5 Supported Messages
The table below lists the RM messages handled:
* When the message is not handled, the RTU returns a Request Reject message (22 h).
3.8.1.2.2.6 Database Constraints
The Prioritized RMs concept does not exist in C264, no cyclical RMs are allowed for HNZ
Elenas.
3.8.1.2.3 Processing Remote Controls
3.8.1.2.3.1 Control Activity
The concept of Control Activity captured by the MS is not supported by the ELENAS HNZ
transmission. As a result, C264 automatically and internally generates an activity capture
upon receipt of a RC message.
3.8.1.2.3.2 Bay/Station Dependency
The Bay/Station concept exists . In C264, you can determine whether individual RCs depend
on the associated bay and station.
When the station or bay is under local control, all station/bay-dependent RCs originating
from the MS are rejected.
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
The table below shows how the S900 acknowledgements are sent back to the MS.
The table below shows how the S900 acknowledgements are sent back to the MS.
* This message is spontaneously sent by the RTU to signal the RCT transition to invalid.
3.8.1.2.6.5 Database Constraints
In order for the EPC 3200 to operate identically to the C264, complete the fields below as
follows:
Clear counter at the end of cumulative period True
Cumulative period storage capacity 12
Cumulative period 10 minutes
3.8.1.2.7 Processing Tap Changer Positions
3.8.1.2.7.1 Coding inputs
In C264, TPs can be 1 of N-, decimal-, or BCD-coded ….
An offset can be added.It is defined in the Data base.
3.8.1.2.7.2 Supported messages
The table below lists the TP messages handled:
The time processing function of the application performs the time setting with Tcur + Delta
and requests the transmission of a response with Delta.
The base rack then distributes timing to all of the expansion racks.
Remember, the C264 is synchronized only after 2 consecutive times setting with the delta
time between the time in second time setting and the current time C264 less than 200 ms.
The C264 remains synchronized during maximum 30 mn without receive time setting.
The Date concept does not exist in ELENAS HNZ. The date, however, is required for the
local RTU operation (i.e. for date/time-stamping logs, reports, etc.). Consequently, the
operator console and the MS will be able to set the RTU time, but the local operator can only
set the date and time if the MS is not accessible (transmission fault).
3.8.1.2.9.2 Database Constraints
Anyone
3.8.1.2.10 Sending Modulo Message
The Modulo message (fc 0F h) is not sent to the MS every 10 minutes, but sent before each
message sending an information with the time within a new modulo.
3.8.1.2.11 Identifying RTU
The ID Request (fc 20 h) is processed by the RTU which returns a RTU ID response (20 h)
specifying the RCP number and DB revision.
The RTU ID message is spontaneously sent after the RTU reset.
3.8.1.2.12 Resetting RTU Remotely
The RTU Reset request (fc 21 h) from the RTU causes a complete RTU reset, with no
response expected. It is like a computer faulty with cause “from the SCADA protocole”
3.8.1.2.13 Rejecting Request
The Request Reject message (fc 22 h) is returned by the RTU upon receipt of a wrong
message from the MS
3.8.1.2.14 Requesting Initiation General Check
When receiving an Initiation General Check Request (fc 13 h, code 00 h), C264 returns the
following sequence of messages:
If during a GC sequence the transmission queue are full, the RTU transmits the End of RS
(and RM) GC for the interrupted GC.
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
3.8.1.2.15 Transmission
3.8.1.2.15.1 Queue and buffer size
A buffer pool is dedicated to the transmission system.
The number of available buffer is design to assume the all system queue number.
200 RS status change can be queued before saturating in the transmission queues.
At the RTU initialization, the queues sizing is dinamicaly done, depending on the frame
length defined in the DB.
3.8.1.2.15.2 Queue saturation processing
When a transmission queue is full, it is cleared and an Info Loss message is queued.
If a GC sequence is interrupted, the end of GC messages are sent before the Info Loss
message.
3.8.1.2.15.3 Transmission queue initialization
The transmission and protocol queue are cleared after a link initialization procedure (SNRM -
UA messages exchange).
3.8.2 Data Specifications
3.8.2.1 Scope
The purpose of this chapter is to describe the relationship between S9R and ELENAS’s
transmission addressing schemes.
3.8.2.2 Data Description
Remote Signalings, Remote Controls, and Internal Signalings
In ELENAS, RSs, RCs, and ISs are identified by a byte number (Byte #), and a bit position in
the byte (in the range of 0-7), which is always specified in the same way. The byte number,
however, is determined by the entity processed:
In the S9R database, the description of the ELENAS HNZ transmission addresses is a two-
step procedure. First, each entity type is given a fixed base address, then each entity in the
type, also known as occurrence, is assigned a relative address. The absolute address of an
entity results from the following equation:
Absolute address = Base address + Relative address
The default base addresses for each entity type are listed below:
RS_base_add 176 (B0 h)
RC_base_add 112 (70 h)
IS_base_add 2
RM_base_add 32 (20 h)
SP_base_add 4
TP_base_add 160 (A0 h)
RCT_base_add 100 (64 h)
3.8.2.3 Identifying Remote Signalings in ELENAS and S9R
3.8.2.3.1 Single RSs
In S9R, SRSs are assigned transmission addresses in the range of 0-4096 decimal.
The ELENAS address (Byte #, Bit Position) is converted into the S900 address (X) using the
following equation:
X = (Byte # - RS_base_add) x 08 h + Bit Position + 10 h
The SRS address range used for ELENAS in S9R will therefore be of 16-655. SRS
addresses are shifted 16 bit positions (10 h) to avoid overlapping IS addresses. Note that ISs
and RSs hare the same address space.
The table below shows the ELENAS-to-S900 address conversion for the first and last SRSs.
It corresponds to the RS default base addresses. S9R addresses are entered by the
operator via GBD 900.
NOTE: In S9R, RS transmission addresses start at location 16. Addresses 0-15 are
to be reserved for ISs.
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
NOTE: As shown above, the first ELENAS address within the RS space is B0
hex, 00, and the corresponding DRS address in GBD 900 is 800
decimal. This does not mean that the first DRS must start at this
address, but from this address. Since a typical configuration usually
combine SRSs and DRSs having the same address space (i.e. B0-FF
h), make sure you insert at least one byte between the two blocks
when generating the DB in order to avoid SRS/DRS overlap.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
NO
00
0
02 ISs 16
ISs
03
04
ASPs
SRs
655
1C 700
1F
DRs
20
ARMs
63 939
64
RCTs
6F
70 0
RCc
SPs
A0
23
TPs
AF
B0
RMs
67
RSs RCTs
11
0
SRCs 95
100
DRCs
147
FF 0
TPs
3
C0383ENa
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
• When the MS communicates with the RTU through a dual line, the MS request is
always received by the RTU on only one of the two lines, and the RTU always
responds to the MS over this single line.
• The CRC generation is slightly different from the standard C264 HNZ procedure. The
CRC field contains the address, control byte, data block, and ETX character. Both the
transparent DLE character in the data and the DLE ETX sequence are processed by
the CRC.
DLE
Only the first two bytes are ignored in the CRC generation.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
3.8.3.3.3.3 Messaging
Refer to section Erreur ! Source du renvoi introuvable. Erreur ! Source du renvoi
introuvable. for the description of the messaging
From CC to RTU, information I frame includes:
P = 1, I = 0
DLE = $ 10
STX = $ 02
ETX = $ 83
In the address, control and information fields the transparency is made by repeating the
character when it is the same as the control character DLE: the maximum length of the
frame depends of the values of the 3-field characters.
The information field contains one or more message, each one identified by its function
code. The number of information-bearing characters of a message can be constant for a
given function code, or variable.
data’s
• Time of day.
7 0
7 0
7 0
DRS byte
V3 S3 V2 S2 V1 S1 V0 S0 S0-S3 = Status*
V0-V3 = Status*
* Same as RS-SC
Section 3.10.5.1
block #n
C0387ENa
Field Description:
The validity of SRSs is not transmitted in RS-GC; invalid SRSs are transmitted in INV-SRS-
GC (see Section 3.10.5.3).
Nb of blocks depends on the frame length.
NOTE: Unused bits are zeroed.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
7 0
Same as RS-GC
Number of blocks
Section 3.10.5.2
V7 V6 V5 V4 V3 V2 V1 V0 V0-V7 = Status*
* Same à RS-GC
Section 3.10.5.1
block #n S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0
V7 V6 V5 V4 V3 V2 V1 V0
C0388ENa
7 0
7 0
7 0
Value
8 unsigned bits:
00 hex => Value => FF hex
8 signed bits:
80 hex => Value => 7F hex
C0391ENa
NOTE: Value is scaled by the C264 following the min and max values of the
Setpoint configured in the database
3.8.5.7 ASP-ACK: ASP Acknowledgement - Source: RTU
7 0
Value
Same as ASP-RS, Section 3.6
ACK ACK: ASP acknowledge code
01 = positive
02 = wrong message
04 = invalid function (e.g. coupler fault)
C0392ENa
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
7 0
Code Request:
00 hex = see "Field description"
01 hex = RS-GC
C0393ENa
Field Description:
Initialization GC code: 00 hex
Upon receipt of a GC-RQ command, the RTU shall return:
• RS general checks;
• Routine message (18 hex) with code 0C hex indicating the end of RS GCs (see
Section 3.9);
• RM general checks;
• TP general checks;
• Routine message (18 hex) with code 0E hex indicating the end of RM GCs (see
Section 3.9).
3.8.5.9 ROUT: Routine Message - Source: RTU
7 0
Code Information:
05 hex = Information loss
06 hex = End of chronology loss
07 hex = Start of chronology loss
0C hex = End of RS general checks
0E hex = End of RM general checks
C0394ENa
7 0
Function code 01 hex
Field Description:
For C264 Nb of blocks is always equal to 1 because the RM is configured in event and is
received one by one from the C264 Scada interface
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
7 0
Function code 02 hex
C0396ENa
Field Description:
Nb of blocks depends on the frame length.
NOTE: Upon completion of RM general check transmission, the RTU issues a
routine message with code 0E hex (refer back to Section 3.10.5.9).
3.8.5.12 RMA-OM: Operating Mode of All RMs - Source: MS
7 0
Function code 01 hex
Field Description:
Mode 00 hex = Unused;
FF hex = All RMs are disabled;
01 hex = End of disabling; RMs operate in state change mode;
02-FE hex = Unused.
7 0
Function code 01 hex
7 0
Function code 04 hex
7 0
Function code 05 hex
C0400ENa
7 0
Function code 04 hex
Modulus
I 0 b21
block #n
Newest value
C0401ENa
7 0
Function code 03 hex
C0402ENa
7 0
Function code 0D hex
The value + V bit give the transmitted value in à 2’s complement code. It inlcudes the offset,
substracted to the acquired value. For example: TPI with value between 1 to 64, an offset
configured with 32, the values sent into the message will be between E1 hex to 20 hex (-31
to 32)
3.8.5.19 TP-GC: TP General Check - Source: RTU
7 0
Function code 3D hex
See "Field
Number of TPs
Description" below
Transmission address of TP #1 A0-AF hex
block #1 Same as TP-SC
V Value
Section 3.18
Field Description:
Nb of TPs depends on the frame length.
NOTE: There is no special Request for TP general checks message. TP-GC
is one of the RTU responses upon receipt of a GC-RQ command from
the Master (refer back to Section 3.8).
3.8.5.20 MODULO: Change Time Modulo - Source: RTU
7 0
Function code 0F hex
Field Description:
MODULO is issued:
7 0
Function code 1D hex
7 0
Function code 1D hex
Field Description:
Modulo/Fraction time is the difference called ‘delta’ between the time received from the
Master and the current time in the RTU.
S specifies the delta sign as follows:
• 0 = The RTU internal time is greater than or equal to the time from the Master;
• 1 = The RTU internal time is less than the time from the Master.
3.8.5.23 ID-RQ: Identification Request - Source: MS
7 0
Function code 20 hex
C0407ENa
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
7 0
Field Description:
RTU ID is numRcp (number of the remote control protocol for the C264) as defined in the
Databases. It is a 9-bit value, where the ninth bit b7 is the MSB of the version number.
Version number is a 7-bit value specifying the database revision level, as defined in
Database.
3.8.5.25 RTU-INI: Remote RTU Initialization - Source: MS
7 0
Function code 21 hex
C0409ENa
NOTE: Upon receipt of a RTU-INI command, the RTU shall fully reset. There
is no RTU response.
This message builds a send_soft_signal with code COMM_INF_REBOOT_BY_SCADA
which will be recorded in the error log file read by the CAT error folder.
3.8.5.26 REQ-REJ: Request Reject - Source: RTU
7 0
Function code 22 hex
Function code is
Rejected code
unknown
C0410ENa
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
MASTER RTU
SNRM
HNZ connection
UA
GC-RQ
STIME
RTU-ID
RS-GC*
RM-GC*
TP-GC*
STIME-R
C0411ENa
The number of GC messages per entity may differ depending on the RTU configuration.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
Source: MS
3.8.8 Cable
A specific cable must be used for HNZ Elenas Protocol:
The communication function between a Remote Terminal Unit RTU and the Control Centre
CC is performed by data exchange through one link.
101 1 1 101
102 7 5 5 7 102
103 2 3 2 3 104
104 3 2 3 2 103
109 8 1 7 4 105
8 5 106
105 4 7 1 8 109
106 5 8
107 6 6 4 20 108
108 20 4 6 6 107
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
4. IED COMMUNICATION
4.1 Overview
Different types of IEDs are connected to a MiCOM C264 through networks using various
legacy protocols:
1. IEC 60870-5-103 (T103)
2. Modbus
3. DNP3
4. IEC 60870-5-101 (T101)
All these networks use a serial link to communicate with IEDs. As there are several serial
links on a MiCOM C264, it is possible to have:
• Request / reply
Master emits a request to a slave of its choice and wait for the response. Between
master and slave, only one transaction can be initiated. Then, in order to transmit the
same request to two different slaves, two transactions are required.
• Broadcast
Master transmits a command to all of slaves connected to the network. They perform it
without send any response.
Data Note
Digital input Treated
Measurement Treated
Default position Depending on the protocol
Counter Treated
Tap position Treated
Control acknowledgement Treated
Setpoint acknowledgement Treated
Alarm Not Treated
Disturbance record Depending on the protocol
Tunnelling Frame response Depending on the protocol
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
4.2.1.2 Output
Data Note
Control Treated
Setpoint Depending on the protocol
Alarm acknowledgement Not Treated
Tunnelling Frame question Depending on the protocol
Time synchronisation Treated
4.2.2 Behaviour
4.2.2.1 Network supervision
The number of networks and IEDs is known by configuration.
Each network is managed independently of the other networks.
The management of a network consists of:
• Repetitions [if an IED doesn’t answer to a request, this request will be repeated the
next cycle]
• When an IED is disconnected, it may be questioned only time to time [not all cycles]
• When an IED has important data to transmit [DI], it may be questioned successively
several times
• Time synchronisation
Synchronisation is done periodically by sending a broadcast frame. After the
synchronisation frame has been sent, the polling starts again.
NOT_
INITIALISED
1
DISCON-
2
NECTED
2
1
CONNECTED
NOT_SYNCHRONISED
12
3 4
IN_SERVICE
5 OUT_OF_
GI
SERVICE
6 7
NORMAL
10 8
11 9 DISTUR-
TUNNELING BANCE
C0109ENa
• NOT_INITIALISED: That’s the initial state of an IED. The MiCOM C264 polls the IED
every cycle in order to connect it.
If the IED responds, it becomes CONNECTED 2 .
If after some attempts the IED doesn’t respond, it becomes DISCONNECTED 1 .
• DISCONNECTED: The IED is disconnected. The MiCOM C264 polls the IED time to
time in order to connect it.
If the IED responds, it becomes CONNECTED 2 .
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
• CONNECTED: The IED is connected. This state includes several states. When an IED
becomes Connected, it goes to the NOT_SYNCHRONISED state.
• OUT_OF_SERVICE: The IED is connected and says it is Out of service. The MiCOM
C264 polls the IED time to time waiting for the IED to become IN_SERVICE 5 .
• IN_SERVICE: The IED is connected and it says it is In Service. This state includes
several states. When an IED becomes In Service, it goes to the GI state.
• NORMAL: The IED is In Service and the monitoring of DI, AO and DO are performed.
If a disturbance record becomes present and the MiCOM C264 have enough places to
store the file, the IED goes in the DISTURBANCE state 8 .
If a request to open a tunnel for the IED arrives, it is accepted and the IED goes in the
TUNNELING state 10 .
Time to Time, a GI may be done. In this case the IED goes in the GI state 7 .
• 5 : see 3
• 8 : A disturbance file is available in the IED and there are enough places to store it in
the MiCOM C264.
A disturbance uploading is activated.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
• at initialisation time
• upon reconnection
• Cyclically [optional]
Messages received during the initial general interrogation are not sent to the processing
function. Instead the content of the table is sent at the end of the sequence.
Messages received during a general interrogation performed after the initialisation sequence
are sent immediately to the processing function
Some IEDs send a message indicating the end of the response to a general interrogation.
When this message is received, the sequence is considered as finished. If the IED does not
send this message, the MiCOM C264 must check that all data are received.
If all data are not received within a given time another request is sent. This process can be
repeated N times. If the response is still not received after N times a fault message is sent,
however the IED is still polled.
Disturbance File Management
The following rules apply for the management of the Disturbance Files of the IED:
• For each IED, there is an information in the configuration indicating if automatic upload
of Disturbance File has to be done. This indication may be overwritten by a command
from the application.
• When the MiCOM C264 detects that an IED has a Disturbance File ready to be
uploaded and that automatic upload is enabled, it uploads and stores it. When the
upload is finished, an indication is sent to the Upper transmission management to
inform it that a Disturbance file is ready.
• When there isn’t enough places to store a Disturbance File, the oldest file is deleted.
• The upper transmission management can only get Disturbance files stored in the
MiCOM C264. Once the upper transmission management has treated a file it is
deleted.
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
If the command is a double command, the application send one order, and depending on the
protocol, two cases have to be distinguished:
• The Double command is referenced only once in the IED Mapping. In this case, if an
OPEN (respectively CLOSE) command is received from the application, the master
send an OFF (respectively ON) order to the IED at the corresponding address.
• The double command is referenced by two addresses in the IED Mapping: one refers
to the Open Contact and the other to the Close Contact. In this case, if an OPEN
(respectively CLOSE) command is received from the application, the master sends an
ON order to the IED, at the address corresponding to the Open Contact (respectively
Close Contact).
4.2.4.2 Setpoints
SP controls are priority message. The polling sequence must be interrupted in order to send
the SP control as soon as possible.
Not all IEDs send SP control acknowledgement. If they do not, an acknowledgement is
simulated and sent to the handling of SP control sequences function.
When an IED is disconnected [or out of service] a negative acknowledgement is sent.
If the SP commands are always "direct execute" command (no “select before operate”).
For an IED, only one SP command is possible at a time.
4.2.5 Tunnelling
The serial tunnelling enable to connect a lap top computer – which run an IED setting
software – to a serial (RS232) line of the PACiS computer in order to communicate with an
IED connected to a legacy bus of the PACiS computer.
C264
Lap Top IED
Computer
All serial RS232 lines of the computer – including the port onto the front panel – can be used
for serial tunnelling.
The choice of the serial line to be used for serial tunnelling is done by the computer
configuration.
The cable dedicated to tunnelling must be disconnected from the front panel when
tunnelling is not used.
4.2.5.1 Interface through the tunnelling serial line
The tunnelling serial line gives access to a user dialog.
This dialog enables an user to give commands to the Tunnelling RS232 software.
Commands are ASCII string terminated by ‘↵’ (code ASCII 13H) and are case sensitive.
A command is executed at the reception of the ‘↵’ character. An ASCII message is sent in
response, and a prompt message may be sent in order to indicate the computer is ready to
treat a new command.
If a command is unknown, an error message “Unknown command !” is sent.
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
• If the questioned IED does not answer, no frame of answer is returned to the setting
Software.
• If the setting software sends a new question frame [or repeats the last frame] whereas
the computer is still awaiting the answer from the IED, this new frame is ignored.
4.2.5.6 Serial tunnelling through a modem
C264
Modem IED
Computer
Specialised
or RTC line RS232 link
Legacy bus
dedicated to serial
(Modbus,
tunneling
T103)
C0150ENa
If modems are well configured, this operating mode is transparent for the computer and no
specific management is needed in the software.
4.2.5.7 Tunnelling limits and Performances
The legacy protocols supported [protocols for which serial tunnelling is available] are the
following :
• MODBUS
• T103
The line to be used for serial tunnelling can be set through computer configuration.
If The serial tunnelling line is “frontal RS232”, it’s automatically configured :
19200Bd, 8 bits data, no parity, 1 stop bit.
For the other ports (COM1 to COM4), it follows the configuration parameters.
Only RS232 mode is supported.
4.2.6 Limits and Performances
• The number of serial links available limits the number of legacy network that can be
managed simultaneously by a MiCOM C264.
• The maximum number of IED that can be managed for a network is 16.
• Performance depends on the protocol used and on the number of IEDs connected to
each Network.
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
Function
Sub-code Used for Commentary
number
1–2 / Read DIs Read N bits
3–4 / Read DIs / MEAS / Read N words
Disturbance files
5 / Write CO Write 1 bit
15 / Write CO Write N bits
This function could be used with the
following restriction: you can only write
COs one after the other.
7 / Polling Read status byte
This function is used for detecting a DI
change of state, the presence of
disturbance files (Schneider Electric
IEDs)
8 0 Polling Echo
This function could be used for
detecting if a device is connected or
not.
6 / Eventually for Write 1 word
tunnelling
16 / Eventually for Write N words
tunnelling
4.3.3 Behaviour
4.3.3.1 Polling
During a polling procedure, each slave is polled one after the other. This means that the
master waits for the answer to a request sent to a device before sending a new request to
the same or an other device.
There will be 2 types of polling:
• the polling performed by the application for the measurements and the digital inputs
Management of Px4x on Modbus will be done on the same scheme than Px2x management.
That implies following rules:
• The C264 synchronizes the Px4x truth the legacy network and has a mean to know if
the Px4x is synchronized;
NOTE: BI, Measurement and Counter are polled with the variation 0. That means
that all variations are required.
All other DNP3 objects are not treated.
4.4.2.2 Output
The DNP3 Master manages both direct control Command and Select before Operate for
digital control only.
When operate command is received from application, the Master checks in database to
know if the command is:
1. An execute command, which belongs to a SBO Control: OPERATE function is used in
this case.
2. A direct control: DIRECT OPERATE function is used is this case
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
4.4.3 Behaviour
• Synchronisation:
− The DNP3 object used to synchronise IEDs is “Write Date and Time Request
(Object 50, Variation 01).
• Initialisation:
− When the response is OK, the Master DNP3 send a message to the application to
tell that connection step is passed.
• General Interrogation:
− When the IED is connected, the MiCOM C264 ask for static data state and value with
a sequence of:
− Read BI,
− Read Measurement,
− Read TPI,
− Read Counter
• Polling:
− Poll Class 0 or Class 1 or Class 2 or Class 3: this is a poll for all EVENT data
followed in return by all (static) current data.
− The polling cycle must be interrupted at minimum in the two following case:
− Clock Synchronisation
− Remote control
• Event acquisition:
− Event occurs spontaneously. The slave device waits for being polled by the master.
With unsolicited reporting, Slave devices can send updates as values change, without
having to wait for a poll from the Master.
• IED monitoring:
• Digital inputs:
− Digital inputs which are received as changes of state are identified by the DNP3
object number 02
− Digital inputs which are received as static data are identified by the DNP3 object
number 01
• Measurements:
− Measurements which are received as changes of state are identified by the DNP3
object number 32
− Measurements which are received as static data are identified by the DNP3 object
number 30
• Counters:
− Counters which are received as changes of state are identified by the DNP3
object number 22
− Counters which are received as static data are identified by the DNP3 object
number 20
4.4.5 Data sent to IEDs
• Controls:
− In case of basic control (Set, Reset, Trip, Close), DNP3 object 12 is used with the
Variation 01
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
Others
______________________________________________________________________________
Attach explanation if 'Variable' or 'Configurable' was checked for any timeout
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change
Events
Specific variation requested: when no specific variation requested:
Never Never
Only time-tagged Binary Input Change With Time
Only non-time-tagged Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable to send both, one or the other Configurable (attach explanation)
(explanation below)
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Qual Func
Qual Codes
Obj Var Description Codes Codes Codes
(hex)
(dec) (hex) (dec)
1 0 Binary Input – All Variations 1, 22 00,01,06
1 1 Binary Input 1 00,01,06 129 00,01 (start-stop)
1 2 Binary Input with Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01 (start-stop)
2 0 Binary Input Change - All Variations 1 06,07,08
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 06,07,08 129 17,28 (index)
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 06,07,08 129 17,28 (index)
2 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 06,07,08 129,130 17,28
10 0 Binary Output - All Variations 1 00,01,06
10 1 Binary Output
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
12 1 Control Relay Output Block (1) 3,4,5,6 17,28 (index) 129 Request echo
20 0 Binary Counter - All Variations 1,7,8,9,10, 00,01,06
22
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01 (start-stop)
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01 (start-stop)
20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01 (start-stop)
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01 (start-stop)
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Qual Func
Qual Codes
Obj Var Description Codes Codes Codes
(hex)
(dec) (hex) (dec)
21 0 Frozen Counter - All Variations 1 00,01,06
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
22 0 Counter Change Event - All Variations 1 06,07,08
22 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event without 1 06,07,08 129 17,18 (index)
Time
22 2 16-Bit Counter Change Event without 1 06,07,08 129 17,18 (index)
Time
22 5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 06,07,08 129 17,18 (index)
22 6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 06,07,08 129 17,18 (index)
Remarks:
Frozen counters (type21) are uploaded during general interrogation, but never polled after this.
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Qual Func
Qual Codes
Obj Var Description Codes Codes Codes
(hex)
(dec) (hex) (dec)
23 0 Frozen Counter Event - All Variations 1 06,07,08
23 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without 1 06,07,08 129,130 17,18 (index)
Time
23 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event without 1 06,07,08 129,130 17,18 (index)
Time
23 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event 1 06,07,08 129,130 17,18
without Time
23 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event 1 06,07,08 129,130 17,18
without Time
30 0 Analogue Input - All Variations 1 00,01,06
30 1 32-Bit Analogue Input 1 00,01,06 129 00,01 (start-stop)
30 2 16-Bit Analogue Input 1 00,01,06 129 00,01 (start-stop)
30 3 32-Bit Analogue Input without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01 (start-stop)
30 4 16-Bit Analogue Input without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01 (start-stop)
32 0 Analogue Change Event - All Variations 1 06,07,08
32 1 32-Bit Analogue Change Event without 1 06,07,08 129 17,18 (index)
Time
32 2 16-Bit Analogue Change Event without 1 06,07,08 129, 17,18 (index)
Time
32 3 32-Bit Analogue Change Event with Time 1 06,07,08 129,130 17,18
32 4 16-Bit Analogue Change Event with Time 1 06,07,08 129,130 17,18
40 0 Analogue Output Status - All Variations 1 00,01,06
40 1 32-Bit Analogue Output Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01 (start-stop)
40 2 16-Bit Analogue Output Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01 (start-stop)
41 1 32-Bit Analogue Output Block 5,6 17,28 (index) 129 Request echo
41 2 16-Bit Analogue Output Block 5,6 17,28 (index) 129 Request echo
50 0 Time and Date - All Variations
50 1 Time and Date 1 07 (quantity=1) 129 07 (quantity=1)
50 2 Time and Date with Interval 2 07 (quantity=1)
51 1 Time and Date CTO 129,130 07 (quantity=1)
51 2 Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO 129,130 07 (quantity=1)
52 1 Time Delay Coarse 129, 07 (quantity=1)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129, 07 (quantity=1)
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 06
60 2 Class 1 Data 1 06,07,08
20,21,22 06
60 3 Class 2 Data 1 06,07,08
20,21,22 06
60 4 Class 3 Data 1 06,07,08
20,21,22 06
4.5.2.2 Output
4.5.3 Behaviour
4.5.3.1 Synchronisation
The “Master T103” link is always synchronised by the MiCOM C264. No calculation of the
transmission delay is performed.
4.5.3.2 Polling
To connect an IED, a “Reset CU” frame is sent to the IED.
By default an IED is polled by a “Polling C2” frame, allowing to get “non priority information”.
If an IED signals it has “priority information”, it is polled with a “Polling C1” frame.
4.5.3.3 IED monitoring
The “OUT_OF_SERVICE” state is managed. It corresponds to the “Lock of communication”
[DI 20].
A GI may be done after each end of Tunnelling session.
The MiCOM C264 may regularly look for Disturbance file presence
4.5.3.4 Tunnelling mode
During tunnelling mode, only polling C2 may be done by the MiCOM C264 [Normally, if
“priority information” is present, the remote Master may send a “polling C1 frame”].
The MiCOM C264 must spy the tunnelling exchange in order not to loose information [DI and
AI change]
For security raison, at the end of a tunnelling session, a GI is done
4.5.3.5 Station Interlocking
This functionality is only available on MiCOM P139 in private T103 range (Schneider Electric
D protocol variant)
After GI, and only if IED is MiCOM Px3x, we send a read on MiCOM Px3x parameter adress
0 which corresponds to Device Type. If MiCOM Px3x responds with analog parameter set to
139, we activate Station Interlocking Management.
Case of local control (front panel of the MiCOM P139) with Station interlock :
As soon as a user will try to control a switchgear by the front panel, the MiCOM P139 will
send an ASDU 72 with FUN/TYP = F8h/74h in order to request to PACiS system the station
interlock conditions. PACiS system should check if the command is allowed (specific
treatment done by CONDUITE of the computer) and respond to the MiCOM P139.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
− DI which are not transmitted during a GI. For these DI, the IED signals only
change of state from OFF to ON. The MiCOM C264 must generate by itself the
change from ON to OFF.
4.5.4.2 Measurements
A Measurement is identified by:
− An ASDU Number [(3,4,9) in public range, (10, 21, 73,77) in private range]
ASDU 21 and 10 provide the acquisition of the following measurements coming from P44x
relay:
• Sum of trips
Description TI VSQ COT ADR FUN INF RII NOG GIN KOD
Measurement 15H 81H 2AH CAD FEH F4H x 1 Courier cell number 1
TI = Type identification
VSQ = variable structure qualifier
COT = cause of transmission
ADR = CAD = common address
FUN = function number
INF = information number
RII = Return information identifier
NOG = Number Of Generic identification
GIN = Generic Identification Number
ASDU 10 provides the response.
4.5.4.3 Bitstring 32-bits :
The state of the IED is identify by the ASDU 71 or 72 with couple FUN / TYP = F8h / 70h.
This ASDU describes the status of the IED (Station Interlocking active or not …)
A request to check station interlocking is identify by the ASDU 71 or 72 with couple FUN /
TYP = F8h / 74h. In this request, the couple FUN/TYP of the command to spend is defined.
4.5.4.4 Analog protection signal (ASDU 49) :
Only for MiCOM Px3x, an analogue protection signal is received after GI
Only address 0 is managed. It is used to recognise MiCOM P139 in order to activate station
interlocking management.
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
Description TI VSQ COT ADR FUN INF DB0-DB4 DB5-DB9 DB10-DB14 DB15-DB19
Energy 4FH 04H 01H CAD F8H 6CH Active + Active - Reactive + Reactive -
counter
TI = Type identification
VSQ = variable structure qualifier
COT = cause of transmission
ADR = CAD = common address
FUN = function number
INF= information number
DB0-DB4 = active energy output
DB5-DB9 = active energy input
DB10-DB14 = reactive energy output
DB15-DB19 = reactive energy input
Format of the energy counter value
Value
Value
Value
S Value
IV CA CY Sequence number
• A DI with the same (Function Type, Information Number) as the control and with a
‘Cause Of Transmission’ equals to ‘positive return’ or ‘negative return’ in public range
• A DI (ASDU 1) with the same (Function Type, Information Number) as the control and
with a ‘Cause Of Transmission’ equals to ‘positive return’ or ‘negative return’ in public
range.
ASDU232 ASDU20
Field Value Field Value
ASDU No E8H ASDU No 14H
VSQ 81H VSQ 81H
COT 14H COT 14H
Device address @ied Common Address @ied
of ASDU
DN2 Cfg Function type Cfg
DN3 Cfg Information Number Cfg
DC0 1=OFF; 2=ON DC0 1=OFF; 2=ON
X 0 RII Set by master
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
ASDU105 ASDU01
Field Value Field Value
ASDU No 69H ASDU No 01H
VSQ 81H VSQ 81H
COT 45H, 46H, 47H, COT 14H, 15H, 0BH
7FH
Device address @ied Common Address @ied
of ASDU
DN2 Idem ASDU232 Function type Idem ASDU20
DN3 Idem ASDU232 Information Idem ASDU20
Number
DPI 1=OFF; 2=ON DPI 1=OFF; 2=ON
X 0 msLow
Four octet binary
msLow msHigh
time
Four octet
msHigh IV 0 mmmmmm
binary time CP32Time2a
IV 0 mmmmmm SU 00 hhhhhh
CP32Time2a
SU 00 hhhhhh SIN Idem RII ASDU20
Configuration
Management of commands through ASDU 232.
System definition
Unbalanced interchange
CIRCUIT V24/V28 Balanced interchange
Recommended if Circuit X24/X27
Standard
> 1200 bits/s
Unbalanced interchange
CIRCUIT V24/V28 Balanced interchange
Recommended if Circuit X24/X27
Standard
> 1200 bits/s
⌧ Two octets
⌧ Structured
⌧ Unstructured
⌧ Three octets
Cause of transmission
(system-specific parameter, all configurations that are used are to be marked ‘X’)
⌧ <14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
<18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1
<19> := Packed output circuit transmission of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
⌧ <36> := Measured value, short floating point number with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TF_1
<39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1
<40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1
File transfer
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ <122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
Special use
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
None
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
<3> M_DP_NA_1 X X X X X
<4> M_DP_TA_1 X X X
<5> M_ST_NA_1 X X X X X
<6> M_ST_TA_1 X X X
<7> M_BO_NA_1
<8> M_BO_TA_1
<9> M_ME_NA_1 X X X X
<10> M_ME_TA_1 X
<11> M_ME_NB_1 X X X X
<12> M_ME_TB_1 X
<13> M_ME_NC_1 X X X X
<14> M_ME_TC_1 X
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X X
<16> M_IT_TA_1 X
<17> M_EP_TA_1
<18> M_EP_TB_1
<19> M_EP_TC_1
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1 X X X
<30> M_SP_TB_1 X X
<31> M_DP_TB_1 X X
<32> M_ST_TB_1 X X
<33> M_BO_TB_1
<34> M_ME_TD_1 X
<35> M_ME_TE_1 X
<36> M_ME_TF_1 X
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1
<40> M_EP_TF_1
<45> C_SC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<46> C_DC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X X
Communications C264P/EN CT/C80
<110> P_ME_NA_1
<111> P_ME_NB_1
<112> P_ME_NC_1
<113> P_AC_NA_1
<120> F_FR_NA_1 X
<121> F_SR_NA_1 X
<122> F_SC_NA_1 X
<123> F_LS_NA_1 X
<124> F_AF_NA_1 X
<125> F_SG_NA_1 X
<126> F_DR_TA_1 X X
Remote initialisation
Read procedure
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
Read procedure
Spontaneous transmission
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ Spontaneous transmission
C264P/EN CT/C80 Communications
General interrogation
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ Global
Group 6 Group 12
⌧ Global
Group 4
Clock synchronisation
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ Clock synchronisation
Notes:
The controlled station reports the change of hour by sending a clock synchronisation message (ASDU 103) to the
controlling station.
Command transmission
(object -specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ C_SE_ACTTERM used
⌧ No additional definition
Persistent output
Parameter loading
(object-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
Threshold value
Smoothing factor
Parameter activation
(object-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
Test procedure
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ Test procedure
File transfer
(station-specific parameter), mark ‘X’ if function is used)
File transfert in monitor direction
⌧ Transparent file
Transparent file
Background scan
(station-specific parameter, mark each type ID ‘X’ if it is only used in the standard direction,
‘R’ if only used in the reverse direction, and ‘B’ is used in both directions)
⌧ Background scan
Test procedure
A test command may be issued by the controlling station to ensure the availability of the
communications link and the commands subsystem.
Test commands are received at the controlled station on the active link. The controlled
station mirrors the test command, on the link from which it was received, with a cause of
transmission indicating activation confirmation.
An error response should be sent if the command is incorrect, with a cause of transmission
indicating negative activation confirmation.
In the case of balanced mode, the controlled station may also send a test command to the
controlling station, to ensure the availability of the communications link as there is no polling
made by the controlling station.
Commissioning C264P/EN CM/C80
MiCOM C264P
COMMISSIONING
Commissioning C264P/EN CM/C80
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2. REQUIREMENTS 5
BLANK PAGE
Commissioning C264P/EN CM/C80
• Commissioning the application (when product has had its database loaded). This
second part is documented and carried out through FAT (Factory Acceptance Tests),
and SAT (Site Acceptance Tests) activities.
The scope of this chapter is the description of commissioning tests that prove that the
MiCOM C264 is suitable for further application tests.
1.3 Commissioning the product
Commissioning the product starts with product reception and is continued through all off the
installation procedures. Activities are divided between: -
• The starting point is the delivery form that describes all of the delivered hardware
components that constitute the MiCOM C264/C264C.
1.4 Responsibility
Most commissioning activities involve a power supply that can damage the installation or
cause injury to the operator. The chapter C264/EN SA (Safety) should be read carefully
before any handling.
Before starting commissioning, the contractual and human responsibilities should be clearly
defined.
Only qualified and competent persons should carry out commissioning and the validation
tests.
C264P/EN CM/C80 Commissioning
2. REQUIREMENTS
It is essential that all requirements expressed in C264/EN IN (Installation) chapter have been
fulfilled.
The delivery form is the starting document.
C264P/EN CM/C80 Commissioning
• Does the nominal (and measured) voltage of the battery agree with the nominal
auxiliary voltage of the device?
• Are the current and voltage transformer (if used) connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on.
After the voltage has been applied, the MiCOM C264 starts up.
During start-up, various tests are carried out (see section entitled ‘Diagnose level1’ in
Chapter C264/EN MF (Maintenance)).
The LED indicator labelled ‘HEALTHY’ (Fourth LED) will light up.
After approximately 30 s, the MiCOM C264 is ready for operation.
In initial, factory-set condition or after a cold restart, the front panel displays a message
“Schneider Electric”.
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out before any
interlocks or isolation is cancelled:
• Are the software and database versions compatible with the hardware?
• Are all communications (S-BUS, T-BUS and L-BUS) correctly configured and
recognised?
S E R V I C E <time>
S E R I A L N B :
S O F T W A R E V E R S I O N :
D B 1 V E R S I O N S T A T E :
D B 2 V E R S I O N S T A T E :
O P E R A T I N G H O U R S :
O P E R A T I N G M O D E :
R E D U N D A N C Y M O D E :
C264P/EN CM/C80 Commissioning
3.3 Faults
If the first LED is alight, this means that there is something wrong inside the C264.
The FAULT panel gives information about the problem.
F A U L T <time>
B O A R D <time>
<Board Label><Number>
<Board Status>
<Board Label><Number>
<Board Status>
<Board Label><Number>
<Board Status>
<Board Label><Number>
<Board Status>
<Board Label><Number>
<Board Status>
<Board Label><Number>
<Board Status>
N°page/Number of Pages
D I <time>
DIU <Number>
DI 0 <status> DI 8 <status>
DI 1 <status> DI 9 <status>
DI 2 <status> DI 10 <status>
DI 3 <status> DI 11 <status>
DI 4 <status> DI 12 <status>
DI 5 <status> DI 13 <status>
DI 6 <status> DI 14 <status>
DI 7 <status> DI 15 <status>
N°page/Number of Pages
C264P/EN CM/C80 Commissioning
D I <time>
CCU <Number>
DI 0 <status>
DI 1 <status>
DI 2 <status>
DI 3 <status>
DI 4 <status>
DI 5 <status>
DI 6 <status>
DI 7 <status>
N°page/Number of Pages
D O <time>
DOU <Number>
DO 0 <status> DO 8 <status>
DO 1 <status> DO 9 <status>
DO 2 <status>
DO 3 <status>
DO 4 <status>
DO 5 <status>
DO 6 <status>
DO 7 <status>
N°page/Number of Pages
Commissioning C264P/EN CM/C80
D O <time>
CCU <Number>
DO 0 <status>
DO 1 <status>
DO 2 <status>
DO 3 <status>
N°page/Number of Pages
I E D <time>
IP CLIENT NB:
IP SERVER : <protocol>
<Server 1 Name>
<Server 1 IP address> <connection state>
<Server 2 Name>
<Server 2 IP address> <connection state>
…
LEGACY DEVICE : <protocol>
<IED 1 name>
<IED 1 address> <connection state>
<IED 1 name>
<IED 1 address> <connection state>
…
N°page/Number of Pages
C264P/EN CM/C80 Commissioning
P1 S1
P2 S2
Other ends
of electrical cables
P0041ENa
P1 S1 _
+ mA
+
_
P2 S2
P0043ENa
• Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio, phase voltage VTs ratio and neutral
voltage VTs ratio as configured in the SCE and S1V4 files
• Apply current to TMU210 inputs terminals 15-16 and verify the IA value shown on the
LCD or on the CAT.
• Apply current to TMU210 inputs terminals 11-12 and verify the IB value shown on the
LCD or on the CAT.
• Apply current to TMU210 inputs terminals 7-8 and verify the IC value shown on the
LCD or on the CAT.
• Apply current to TMU210 inputs terminals 3-4 and verify the IN value shown on the
LCD or on the CAT.
• Apply voltage to TMU210 inputs terminals 21-22 and verify the VA value shown on the
LCD or on the CAT.
• Apply voltage to TMU210 inputs terminals 23-24 and verify the VB value shown on the
LCD or on the CAT.
• Apply voltage to TMU210 inputs terminals 25-26 and verify the VC value shown on the
LCD or on the CAT.
• Apply voltage to TMU210 inputs terminals 27-28 and verify the VN or VBB value
shown on the LCD or on the CAT.
Log the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values and C264P values
displayed).
C264P/EN CM/C80 Commissioning
CONFIGURATION
General Options
2Vpp+Vr
Transfo. Ratio
Line CT primary 1A
Line CT Sec 1A
E/Gnd CT primary 1A
E/Gnd CT Sec 1A
Line VT primary 0.100 kV
Line VT Sec 100.0 V
E/Gnd VT primary 0.100 kV
E/Gnd VT Sec 100.0 V
Protection Menu G1
I> Yes
I> VALUE 1 In
tI> DT or IDMT or RI
tI> (if DT) 10 s
Curve (if IDMT) IEC VI or IEEE VI
TMS value (if IDMT) 1
K value (if RI) 1
U> OR
U> VALUE 20V
tU> 10 s
U< OR
U< VALUE 20V
tU< 10 s
Ie> Yes
Ie> VALUE 1 In
tIe> DT or IDMT or RI
tIe> (if DT) 20 s
Curve (if IDMT) IEC VI or IEEE VI
TMS value (if IDMT)1 K value (if RI)=1
Commissioning C264P/EN CM/C80
Un> 10 V
tUn> 10 s
Automation Menu
TRIP tI> YES
TRIP tU> YES
TRIP tIe> YES
TRIP Un> YES
• If the time delay tI> is short, gradually increase the injection current up to the value of
the I> threshold.
• If the time delay tI> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no tripping.
Then inject 1,1 x I threshold and check the trip.
• Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out off
(I> threshold).
Checks:
• Apply a current into one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre-setting
the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
• Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre-setting
the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
Checks:
• Alarm message on the LCD display for I> after that the setting trip delay time is
expired (if configured)..
• Alarm LED flashes > after that the setting trip delay time is expired (if configured)..
• Trip LED on after that the setting trip delay time is expired(if configured)..
• I> threshold LED on (if configured).> after that the setting trip delay time is expired.
• Trip output closes > after that the setting trip delay time is expired (if configured)..
• I> threshold output closes (if configured).> after that the setting trip delay time is
expired.
C264P/EN CM/C80 Commissioning
IEEE/ANSI curves
RI electromechanical curve
• If tU> time delay is short, gradually raise the injection voltage up to the value of U>
threshold.
• If U> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x U> threshold setting and check there is no trip.
Then inject 1.1 x U> threshold setting and check the trip output is close.
• Gradually lower the injected current and note the value of the drop out U> threshold.
Checks:
• Alarm message on the LCD display for U> after that the setting trip delay time is
expired (if configured)..
• Alarm LED flashes (if configured). after that the setting trip delay time is expired.
• Trip LED on, after that the setting trip delay time is expired (if configured).
• U> threshold LED on (if configured) > after that the setting trip delay time is expired.
• Trip output closes U> after that the setting trip delay time is expired (if configured).
• U> threshold output closes (if configured) after that the setting trip delay time is
expired.
3.20.2.1.3 Earth fault overcurrent and residual over voltage test.
Delay type: Definite time
Used thresholds for this test:
• Supply the C264P, inject current and voltage with magnitude greater then Ie> and Un>
setting value.
• If the time delay tIe> is short, gradually increases injection current up to the value of
the Ie> threshold.
• If the time delay tIe> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no
tripping. Then inject 1,1 x Ie threshold and check the trip.
• Gradually decreases the injected current and record the value of the drop out Ie>
threshold.
• Checks:
• Ie>, tIe>
• Supply the C264P inject a current equal to 2 x Ie> threshold into one of the earth
current inputs. Repeat the operation for various current values (n x Ie threshold with n
ranging from 4 to 10, for example). Check that the values measured correspond to
those indicated in the table below (for TMS=1).
IEC curves
IEEE/ANSI curves
Checks:
CONFIGURATION
General Options
3Vpp+Vr
Transfo. Ratio
Line VT primary 0.100 kV
Line VT Sec 100.0 V
E/Gnd VT primary 0.100 kV
E/Gnd VT Sec 100.0 V
Protection Menu G1
- [81] f1? MIN
- f1 VALUE 49Hz
- tf1 1s
- [81] f2? MAX
- f2 VALUE 51 Hz
- tf2 1s
- df/dt1? ON
- df/dt1 VALUE +0.5 Hz/s
- t df/dt1 1s
- df/dt1 Id 1A
- df/dt2? ON
- df/dt2 VALUE -0.5 Hz/s
- t df/dt2 1s
- df/dt2 Id 1A
Automation Menu
TRIP f1 YES
TRIP f2 YES
TRIP df/dt1 YES
TRIP df/dt2 YES
• df/dt1 & df/dt2 Alarm messages on the LCD display (if configured)..
• Alarm LED flashes (if configured)..
• Trip LED on (if configured).
• df/dt1 & df/dt2 thresholds LED on (if configured).
• Trip output closes (if configured).
• df/dt1 & df/dt2 threshold outputs close (if configured).
3.21 Final checks
1. Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc… If it is necessary to disconnect any
of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it
should be ensured that all connections are replace in accordance with the relevant
external connection or scheme diagram.
2. If a test block is installed, remove the test plug and replace the cover so that the
C264P is put into service.
3. Ensure that all event, fault and disturbance records, alarm and LEDs have been reset
before leaving the C264P.
4. If the relays are in a new installation or the circuit breaker has been just maintained,
the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters
have to be reset.
Record Sheet C264P/EN RS/C80
MiCOM C264P
RECORD SHEET
Record Sheet C264P/EN RS/C80
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2. COMMISSIONING RECORD 4
BLANK PAGE
Record Sheet C264P/EN RS/C80
2. COMMISSIONING RECORD
Commissioning Date:
Engineer:
Station Name:
Circuit Name:
Front Plate Information
Under the top access cover, there is the following type of label:
Cortec number
Nominal wetting
Nominal Power voltage for digital
supply Input inputs
Voltage C0151ENa
Fill in the following array according to the label under the top access cover:
Serial number
Cortec number
Auxiliary voltage for power supply
Nominal wetting voltage for digital inputs
*Delete as appropriate
Have all relevant safety instructions been followed? Yes/No*
Product checks
Visual inspection with the computer de-energized
Slot letter in
the rack Previous board New board
DATE Engineer Board type
(between A Serial number Serial number
and Q)
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
C264P/EN RS/C80 Record Sheet
BLANK PAGE
Maintenance C264P/EN MF/C80
MiCOM C264P
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance C264P/EN MF/C80
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BLANK PAGE
Maintenance C264P/EN MF/C80
• LEDs
The first 5 LEDs indicate the MiCOM C264/C264C status information. With reference to the
C264/EN HI (Human Interface) chapter, the LEDs indicate from top to down:
LED id Colour LED on LED slow blinking LED fast blinking LED off
1 Red There is at least one There is at least one minor Not used No fault
major fault (hardware, fault (I/O board,
database) (1) communication to IEDs)(2)
2 Yellow All the alarms are ac- All alarms displayed in There is at least 1 No alarm
knowledged, but there the alarm panel are not acknowledged
is at least one alarm inactive and alarm displayed in
still active. (3) acknowledged the alarm panel
3 Yellow Computer in operation Computer in maintenance Computer in test Computer in
reboot
4 Green Power on Not used Not used Power off
5 (4) Red All bays managed by Bays managed by the Not used All bays
the computer are in computer are not in the managed by the
LOCAL mode same control mode computer are in
REMOTE
6 Red Global fault (5) Not used Not used No fault at all
(1) Major fault: MiCOM C264 not available due to internal failure (database error, CPU
board failure, …).
(2) A minor fault is a fault causing only the non availability of a part of the functionality.
(3) When the alarm disappears, the LED returns automatically to OFF.
(4) Assigned by computer only for without LCD panel: GHU2x1 or for an extension C264
(5) It may be a board fault, an IED fault, a power off, a watchdog issue (DO#0 of BIU
board), an IED or extension disconnected
C264P/EN MF/C80 Maintenance
A minor fault is a fault causing only the non-availability of a part of the functionality:
NOTE: After a reboot using the CMT, the PSL might do not work. Use the
serial link instead and type ‘reboot’ in Hyperterminal.
increase (resp. decrease) the brightness of the front panel LCD by pressing button
(resp. button )
Maintenance C264P/EN MF/C80
1 2 1
3 4 Connector
CT/VT fixation screw
Earthing
connection 5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Connector
fixation screw
25 26
27 28
24
C0112ENa
The boards within the MiCOM C264/C264C are now accessible. Figures above show the
board locations for the MiCOM C264/C264Cs in size 40TE (C264C) and size 80TE (C264)
cases respectively.
Looking to the front of the MiCOM C264/C264C with the front panel off, you can have access
to a printed circuit that connects all the boards together: this is the backplane board.
Maintenance C264P/EN MF/C80
• Pull the backplane board (FBP280 for C264 or FBP242 for C264C) out by holding it by
the two extremities.
• Remove the screws and the maintain bar at the bottom of the case.
NOTE: To ensure compatibility, always replace a faulty board with one of an
identical part number and set jumpers in identical position.
All the boards are shown and described in HW chapter.
2.3.2.1 Replacement of the Binary Input Unit (BIU241/261)
The BIU is the power supply board located on the extreme left-hand side (slot A) of MiCOM
C264/C264C.
Pull the power supply module forward, away from the rear terminal blocks and out of the
case. A reasonable amount of force will be required to achieve this due to the friction
between the contacts of the two medium duty terminal blocks. It is then recommended to use
the special tool for extracting board (internal reference is 2070860).
Do not forget to set the jumpers on the new board in the same position as the previous one.
2.3.2.2 Replacement of the main processor board (CPU260/CPU270)
Depending on the model of the MiCOM C264/C264C the processor board carried out the
IRIG-B functionality’s so if you identify an IRIG-B connection problem you will have to
replace the processor board.
After replacement of the main processor board, all the settings required for the application
will need to be re-entered.
The CPU board is located next to the BIU board (slot B).
Do not forget to disconnect the rear cables (RJ45 Ethernet, optical fibres, IRIG-B connector
and serial links) before replacing the board and to reconnect them after.
Do not forget to set the jumpers on the new board in the same position as the previous one.
2.3.2.3 Replacement of the Ethernet switch boards (SWU20x or SWR20x or SWD20x)
The Ethernet switch board is located on slot C.
Do not forget to disconnect the rear cables (RJ45 Ethernet and optical fibres) before
replacing the board and to reconnect them after.
Do not forget to set the jumpers on the new board in the same position as the previous one.
2.3.2.4 Replacement of the I/O boards (DIU200, DIU211, DOU201, CCU200, CCU211, AIU201,
AIU210, AIU211, AOU200 )
The I/O boards can be located in any slot from C to Q.
Do not forget to set the jumpers on the new board in the same position as the previous one.
WARNING: The insert or extraction of the AOU200 board in skew could lead one capacity
(C27) to touch an iron corner. The manipulation of boards is to be done carefully.
2.3.2.5 Replacement of the Transducerless Measurements Unit (TMU)
The measurement unit is on the extreme right-hand side of MiCOM C264/C264C.
C264P/EN MF/C80 Maintenance
When operator connects to the webserver the following dialog box is displayed.
• the computer identification ( name, serial number, IP addresses for port 1 and 2)
• name
• version
• the status of each board ( configured and present / configured and absent / present
and not configured / faulty)
• the status ( valid ON / valid OFF) of the binary inputs of boards BIU241, DIU200,
DIU211, CCU200, CCU211 ( if configured and present)
• the status ( valid OPEN / valid CLOSE) of the binary outputs of boards BIU241,
DOU201, CCU200, CCU211 ( if configured and present)
• Temperature
• Voltage
• validity
• signal level
3.1.5.3 Synchronisation information
• UTC date
• local date
• time zone
To upload the VAL file to Micom S1, create a new register key. The name of the key is
“VERSION”. It is located under :
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\PACIS\MICOM S1\Settings\ The value of this
key can be 0 or 1. The default value is 1.
C264P/EN MF/C80 Maintenance
BLANK PAGE
Current transformer technical Data C264P/EN CD/C80
MiCOM C264P
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
TECHNICAL DATA
Current transformer technical Data C264P/EN CD/C80
CONTENTS
TABLES
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Symbol Description
ALF Accuracy Limit Factor
ANSI American National Standards Institute
C IEEE standard C57.13 "C" classification
CT Current Transformer
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung (German standards body)
DT Definite Time
E/F Earth Fault
IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
MCB Mini Circuit Breaker
Metrosil Brand of non-linear resistor produced by M&I Materials Ltd.
O/C Overcurrent
ph Phase
REF Restricted Earth Fault
rms Root mean square
SEF Sensitive Earth Fault
SIR Source Impedance Ratio
VA Current transformer rated burden
VT Voltage Transformer
I' f Maximum internal secondary fault current (may also be expressed as a multiple of
A
In)
I >> Second stage current setting of short circuit element (overcurrent) In
I Rm 2 Second knee-point bias current threshold setting of P63x biased differential element A
I ref Reference current of P63x calculated from the reference power and nominal voltage A
Vn Nominal voltage V
X
Primary system reactance/resistance ratio None
R
Xe
Primary system reactance/resistance ratio for earth loop None
Re
BLANK PAGE
Current transformer technical Data C264P/EN CD/C80
IEC60044 defines the limiting secondary voltage of the excitation characteristic as the point
at which a 10% increase in secondary voltage requires a 50% increase in excitation current.
This is also commonly referred to as the knee-point voltage. The knee-point may be
regarded as the practical limit beyond which a specified current ratio may not be maintained,
as the current transformer enters saturation. Since the shunt admittance is not linear in this
region, both the excitation and secondary currents depart from their sinusoidal form. ANSI
and IEEE have a different definition of the knee-point voltage.
1.3 Rated accuracy limit factor
A current transformer is designed to maintain its ratio within specified limits up to a certain
value of primary current, expressed as a multiple of its rated primary current. This multiple is
known as the current transformer’s rated accuracy limit factor (ALF).
C264P/EN CD/C80 Current transformer technical Data
• IEC60044-1 classes P, PX
• IEC60044-1 class PR
Class P CTs are defined such that the current, phase and composite errors do not exceed
the values given in Table 1, at the rated frequency and burden.
2.2.2 Class PX
Class PX CTs are typically used for high impedance circulating current protection. They are
also suitable for most other protection applications.
Class PX CTs have high remanence and low leakage reactance. To assess their
performance in relation to the protective relay system in which they are to be used, you only
need knowledge of:
• Wattmetric (32N),
• Undercurrent (37),
CT Input In CT Burden
Phase 1A < 0.1VA at In
Earth 1A < 0.005VA at 0.1In
Phase 5A < 0.25VA at In
Earth 5A < 0.01VA at 0.1In
Table 1: Current circuit for C264P
Vn VT Burden
57 - 130V 0.08VA at 57V
57 - 130V 0.4VA at 130V
57 - 130V 1.5 VA at 260V
Table 2: Voltage circuit for C264P
Current transformer technical Data C264P/EN CD/C80
Where the criteria (for a specific application) are in excess of those detailed above, or the
actual lead resistance exceeds the limiting values, the CT requirements may need to be
increased according to the formulae in the following sections. For specific applications such
as SEF, refer to the sections below for CT accuracy class and knee-point voltage
requirements as appropriate.
C264P/EN CD/C80 Current transformer technical Data
3.4 Protection
VA × ALF
Vk ≥ + ( ALF × I n Rct )
In
If Rct is not available, then the second term in the above equation can be ignored as it
typically only adds a small amount to the estimated secondary limiting voltage.
To ensure that the current transformer has a high enough rating for the relay’s burden it is
necessary to work out the current transformer’s continuous VA rating using the following
formula:
Example 1:
An estimate of the secondary limiting voltage of a 400/5A current transformer of class 5P 10
with a rated output burden of 15VA and a secondary winding resistance of 0.2Ω will be:
15 × 10
Vk ≈ + 10 × 5 × 0.2 = 40V
5
Example 2:
For a particular application of a 1A MiCOM overcurrent relay it is required to determine the
most appropriate class P current transformer to be used. The secondary limiting voltage
required has been calculated at 87.3V using a current transformer secondary winding
resistance of 2Ω.
The current transformer rated output burden must be:
VA × ALF
Vk = + ALF × I nRct
In
2.5 × ALF
87.3 = + ALF × 1× 2 = 4.5 × ALF
1
∴ ALF = 19.4
The nearest accuracy limit factor above 19.4 is 20.
Therefore the current transformer required to supply the MiCOM overcurrent relay will be a
2.5VA 10P 20. (i.e. 2.5VA is the rated burden, 10 (%) is the nominal accuracy class, 20 is
the ALF).
C264P/EN CD/C80 Current transformer technical Data
* Assuming 0.002 ohms per turn typical secondary winding resistance for 5A CTs.
Current transformer technical Data C264P/EN CD/C80
V p = 2 2Vk (V f −Vk )
V f = I ' f (Rct + 2 Rl + Rs )
When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000V peak, Metrosils should be
applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the purpose of shunting the
secondary current output of the current transformer from the relay in order to prevent very
high secondary voltages.
Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their operating
characteristics follow the expression:
V = CI 0.25
with:
The Metrosil units for 1A CTs have been designed to comply with the following restrictions:
At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 30mA rms.
At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil should limit the voltage to
1500V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1A CTs are as shown in the following
table:
Nominal
Relay Voltage Recommended Metrosil Type
Characteristic
Setting
C β Single Pole Relay Triple Pole Relay
Up to 125V rms 450 0.25 600A/S1/S256 600A/S3/1/S802
125 - 300V rms 900 0.25 600A/S1/S1088 600A/S3/1/S1195
Table 8: Metrosil units
NOTE: Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without mounting
brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer.
Metrosil units for relays using 5A CTs
These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements:
At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 100mA rms (the actual
maximum currents passed by the units is shown below their type description).
At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to
1500V rms for 0.25s. At the higher relay settings, it is not possible to limit the fault voltage to
1500V rms hence higher fault voltages have to be tolerated (indicated by *, **, ***).
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5A CTs and single pole relays are as
shown in the following table:
LEXICON
Lexicon C264P/EN LX/C80
Page 1/14
CONTENT
2. LEXICON 4
C264P/EN LX/C80 Lexicon
Page 2/14
BLANK PAGE
.
Lexicon C264P/EN LX/C80
Page 3/14
Page 4/14
2. LEXICON
AC Alternating Current
AccI Accumulator Input
ACSI Abstract Communication Service Interface
Mapping from the standard IEC61850 abstract specification of communication
service to a concrete communication infrastructure based on CORBA specific.
A/D Analog/Digital
ADC Analogue to Digital Converter
AE qualifier Application Entity qualifier (Used internally by IEC61850 to identify a server
Application)
AI Analogue Input (Measurement Value including state attribute)
Commonly Voltage or current DC signals delivered by transducers, and
representing an external value (refer to CT/VT for AC).
AIS Air Insulated Substation
AIU Analogue Input Unit (Computer C264 Board name for DC Analogue Input)
Alarm An alarm is any event tagged as an alarm during configuration phase
AO Analogue Output
Value corresponding to a desired output current applied to a DAC.
AOU Analogue Output Unit (computer C264 board name for Analogue Output)
API Application Programming Interfaces
AR Auto-Reclose
ARS Auto-Recloser
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASDU Application Specific Data Unit
Name given in OSI protocol for applicative data (T103, T101..)
ASE Applied System Engineering
ATCC Automatic Tap Change Control
Automation in charge of secondary voltage regulation, more specific than AVR
AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator
Automatism used to regulate secondary voltage by automatic tap changer
control (see ATCC). Set of features can be added, see chapter C264 FT
Bay Set of LV, MV or HV plants (switchgears and transformers) and devices
(Protective, Measurement…) usually around a Circuit Breaker and controlled
by a bay computer.
BCD Binary Coded Decimal
One C264 supported coding on a set of Digital Inputs, that determine a Digital
Measurement, then Measurement value (with specific invalid code when coding
is not valid). Each decimal digit is coded by 4 binary digits.
BCP Bay Control Point
Name given to the device or part used to control a bay. It can be Mosaic Panel,
C264 LCD,… Usually associate with Remote/Local control.
BCU Bay Control Unit
Name given to the C264 in charge of a bay. Usually in contrast with Standalone
BI Binary Input (or Information)
Name given into Computer C264 of information already filtered, before it
becomes an SPS, DPS… with time tag and quality attributes
BIU Basic Interface Unit
C264 Board for auxiliary power supply(ies), watchdog relay, redundancy I/O,
serial port(s).
Lexicon C264P/EN LX/C80
Page 5/14
Page 6/14
Page 7/14
Page 8/14
Page 9/14
Page 10/14
Page 11/14
ST Structured Text
An IEC1131-3 programming languages to define configurable automation
STP Shielded Twisted Pair
C264P/EN LX/C80 Lexicon
Page 12/14
Page 13/14
VT Voltage Transformer
Basically the electric device connected to process and extracting a voltage
measurement. By extension part of a device (C264) that receives this AC value
and convert it to numerical measurement value. VT are wired in parallel.
WTS Windows Terminal Server, Microsoft’s remote desktop connection
WYE Three phases + neutral AI values
C264P/EN LX/C80 Lexicon
Page 14/14
BLANK PAGE
Annex C264P/EN AN/C80
MiCOM C264P
ANNEX:
COMMUNICATION
ETHERNET SWITCHES
Annex: SW Communication C264P/EN AN/C80
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION 3
1.1 MiCOM C264 Ethernet Switch boards 3
1.2 Ethernet Switch names 3
1.3 C264 Ethernet switch boards 3
1. INTRODUCTION
MiCOM C264 Ethernet switches are designed to address the needs of a wide range of
electric plant. Emphasis has been placed on strong compliance to standards, scalability,
modularity and open architecture.
These facilitate use in a range of applications from the most basic to the most demanding.
They also ensure interoperability with existing components.
Schneider Electric philosophy is to provide a range of Ethernet products like switch that
match all general requirements needed in electric substation: power supply, immunity to
environmental constraints.
It provides also solutions to specific requirement like for example network redundancy
management and high availability performances.
Each of these boards can be used in MiCOM C264 “standalone” application or can be
integrated to a Digital Control System (DCS) (as PACIS) or to various kind of systems and
SCADA architectures.
1.1 MiCOM C264 Ethernet Switch boards
Driven by the requirements around the world for advanced applications in SCADA, Digital
Control Systems, Automation, control and monitoring, Schneider Electric has designed and
still developing a complete range of products that communicate via Ethernet links.
Electric plant requirements lead to constraints that are rarely full-filled by standard Ethernet
products: environmental, power supply, redundancy, etc.
This new MiCOM range of Ethernet switch, the MiCOM Hxxx and SWxxx has been specially
tailored for the PACiS system. The MiCOM Hxxx and SWxxx range is designed to address
the needs of a wide range of installations, from small to large and customer applications.
1.2 Ethernet Switch names
Basically the naming of Ethernet switch boards depends on its facilities and its interface:
copper, optical single-Mode, optical Multi-Mode.
The existing devices are:
S0204ENa
Port MII
SHM N°
Failsafe Self healing ring
output relays manager
Primary Fiber
Secondary Fiber
Optical Ring
C0420ENa
• Watching the quality of transmission. Each frame (Ethernet packet or checking frame)
is controlled by the SHM. A detection of large error rate will eliminate the faulty link
and start automatically the self healing,
• Supervising the link same in the absence of traffic on the primary link (every 5 μs
checking frames are sending to test the link). The link is supervised permanently with
the real frame.
C264P/EN AN/C80 Annex: SW Communication
Primary fiber
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
ES RS
Primary fiber
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
ES RS
When the frame circulates on the ring it does not cross the switch the transit time is only tl.
Annex: SW Communication C264P/EN AN/C80
2.1.6 Benefits
• Ultra fast ring redundant capability (< 1ms for network reconfiguration)
• Fast propagation on the ring (no transfer time (Store and forward mechanism ) with
the switch)
• Ring management
2.2 SNMP Management
Simple Network Management Protocol is the network protocol developed to manage devices
on an IP network. With SNMP the available information is defined by Management
Information Bases (MIB). The format of SNMP data takes the form of a tree structure, with
each node in the tree being identified by a numerical Object IDentifier (OID). Each OID
identifies a variable that can be read or set via SNMP with an appropriate software. The
information in the MIBs is standardised.
2.2.1 SWR21x - MIB Structure
The SNMP MIB consists in distinct OIDs; each of them refers to a defined collection of
specific information used to manage devices on the Schneider Electric’ ring. The
Schneider Electric MIB uses three types of OID.
System:
Address Name
0 Ccitt
1 ISO
3 Org
6 DOD
1 Internet
2 mgmt
1 Mib-2
1 sys
1 sysDescr Schneider Electric repeater
2 sysObjectID Optical Link Status :
1 – No Default
2 – Default Rs
3 – Default Rp
4 – No Link
3 sysUpTime The time (in hundredths of a
second) since the switch was last
re-initialized.
4 sysContact
5 sysName SWR21
6 sysLocation
C264P/EN AN/C80 Annex: SW Communication
RMON:
Address Name
0 Ccitt
1 ISO
3 Org
6 DOD
1 Internet
2 mgmt
1 Mib-2
16 Rmon
1 stat
1 etherstat
1 Port number (*)
9 etherStatsIndex etherStatsUndersizePkts
10 etherStatsIndex etherStatsOversizePkts
12 etherStatsIndex etherStatsJabbers
13 etherStatsIndex etherStatsCollisions
14 etherStatsIndex etherStatsPkts64Octets
15 etherStatsIndex etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
16 etherStatsIndex etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
17 etherStatsIndex etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
18 etherStatsIndexetherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
19 etherStatsIndexetherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
*Port number: 1 to 4: standard ports
5 and 6: ports for redundant ring
2.3.1 LEDs
The table below indicates the function of each LED:
Upon power up the SWR21xx will go through a series of self-testing. The 5 “link LED” will
flash a few seconds.
C264P/EN AN/C80 Annex: SW Communication
2.4 Settings
2.4.1 Internal Jumpers
OPEN CLOSE
Address = 11
Annex: SW Communication C264P/EN AN/C80
FIGURE 5: IP ADDRESS
NOTE: It is important to note that the Schneider Electric_Switch_manager
Software forces the third IP field to “254” value.
2.5 Connections
2.5.1 J14 Fault signal output
The optical ring is monitored. If one link come down the default is announced by the
contacts:
2 Common
Closed if Self-healing
C0121ENb
1 2
Main Links
« Dual Homing » B1
Links A et B A2 B2
A1
SWITCH SWITCH
Network A Network B
Dual Homing
Dual Homing 4
3
Main Links
3
4
6
C0423ENa
Annex: SW Communication C264P/EN AN/C80
Port MII
SHM N°
Failsafe Self healing ring
output relays manager
R link A
E link A
R link B
E link B
J10:
Adress of
repeater
J12:
Reserved
C0425ENa
Annex: SW Communication C264P/EN AN/C80
3.5.1 LEDs
The table below indicates the function of each LED:
Upon power up the SWD21 will go through a series of self-testing. The 5 “link LED” will flash
a few seconds.
3.6 Settings
Report to § 2.4.
C264P/EN AN/C80 Annex: SW Communication
3.7 Connections
3.7.1 J14 Fault signal output
The optical health is monitored. If one link come down the default is announced by the
contacts:
2 Common
Closed if Self-healing
C0121ENb
BLANK PAGE
Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: C264P/EN T/C80 01/2012